11 Math

Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Exercise 1.1
Question 1: Which of the following are sets? Justify our answer. (i) The collection of all months of a year beginning with the letter J. (ii) The collection of ten most talented writers of India. (iii) A team of eleven best-cricket batsmen of the world. (iv) The collection of all boys in your class. (v) The collection of all natural numbers less than 100. (vi) A collection of novels written by the writer Munshi Prem Chand. (vii) The collection of all even integers. (viii) The collection of questions in this Chapter. (ix) A collection of most dangerous animals of the world. Answer (i) The collection of all months of a year beginning with the letter J is a well-defined collection of objects because one can definitely identify a month that belongs to this collection. Hence, this collection is a set. (ii) The collection of ten most talented writers of India is not a well-defined collection because the criteria for determining a writers talent may vary from person to person. Hence, this collection is not a set. (iii) A team of eleven best cricket batsmen of the world is not a well-defined collection because the criteria for determining a batsmans talent may vary from person to person. Hence, this collection is not a set. (iv) The collection of all boys in your class is a well-defined collection because you can definitely identify a boy who belongs to this collection. Hence, this collection is a set. (v) The collection of all natural numbers less than 100 is a well-defined collection because one can definitely identify a number that belongs to this collection. Hence, this collection is a set. (vi) A collection of novels written by the writer Munshi Prem Chand is a well-defined collection because one can definitely identify a book that belongs to this collection. Page 1 of 44
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717
Head Office: 1/3-H-A-2, Street # 6, East Azad Nagar, Delhi-110051 (One Km from Welcome Metro Station)
Class XI Hence, this collection is a set.
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(vii) The collection of all even integers is a well-defined collection because one can definitely identify an even integer that belongs to this collection. Hence, this collection is a set. (viii) The collection of questions in this chapter is a well-defined collection because one can definitely identify a question that belongs to this chapter. Hence, this collection is a set. (ix) The collection of most dangerous animals of the world is not a well-defined collection because the criteria for determining the dangerousness of an animal can vary from person to person. Hence, this collection is not a set.
Question 2: Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Insert the appropriate symbol or in the blank spaces: (i) 5A (ii) 8A (iii) 0A (iv) 4A (v) 2A (vi) 10A Answer (i) 5 A (ii) 8 A (iii) 0 A (iv) 4 A (v) 2 A (vi) 10 A
Question 3: Write the following sets in roster form: (i) A = {x: x is an integer and 3 < x < 7}. (ii) B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6}. (iii) C = {x: x is a two-digit natural number such that the sum of its digits is 8} (iv) D = {x: x is a prime number which is divisor of 60}. (v) E = The set of all letters in the word TRIGONOMETRY. (vi) F = The set of all letters in the word BETTER.
Page 2 of 44
Class XI Answer
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) A = {x: x is an integer and 3 < x < 7} The elements of this set are 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 only. Therefore, the given set can be written in roster form as A = {2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6} The elements of this set are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 only. Therefore, the given set can be written in roster form as B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} (iii) C = {x: x is a two-digit natural number such that the sum of its digits is 8} The elements of this set are 17, 26, 35, 44, 53, 62, 71, and 80 only. Therefore, this set can be written in roster form as C = {17, 26, 35, 44, 53, 62, 71, 80} (iv) D = {x: x is a prime number which is a divisor of 60} 2 2 3 60 30 15 5 60 = 2 2 3 5 The elements of this set are 2, 3, and 5 only. Therefore, this set can be written in roster form as D = {2, 3, 5}. (v) E = The set of all letters in the word TRIGONOMETRY There are 12 letters in the word TRIGONOMETRY, out of which letters T, R, and O are repeated. Therefore, this set can be written in roster form as E = {T, R, I, G, O, N, M, E, Y} (vi) F = The set of all letters in the word BETTER There are 6 letters in the word BETTER, out of which letters E and T are repeated. Therefore, this set can be written in roster form as
Page 3 of 44
Class XI F = {B, E, T, R}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 4: Write the following sets in the set-builder form: (i) (3, 6, 9, 12) (ii) {2, 4, 8, 16, 32} (iii) {5, 25, 125, 625} (iv) {2, 4, 6 } (v) {1, 4, 9 100} Answer (i) {3, 6, 9, 12} = {x: x = 3n, n N and 1 n 4} (ii) {2, 4, 8, 16, 32} It can be seen that 2 = 21, 4 = 22, 8 = 23, 16 = 24, and 32 = 25. {2, 4, 8, 16, 32} = {x: x = 2n, n N and 1 n 5} (iii) {5, 25, 125, 625} It can be seen that 5 = 51, 25 = 52, 125 = 53, and 625 = 54. {5, 25, 125, 625} = {x: x = 5n, nN and 1 n 4} (iv) {2, 4, 6 } It is a set of all even natural numbers. {2, 4, 6 } = {x: x is an even natural number} (v) {1, 4, 9 100} It can be seen that 1 = 12, 4 = 22, 9 = 32 100 = 102. {1, 4, 9 100} = {x: x = n2, nN and 1 n 10}
Question 5: List all the elements of the following sets: (i) A = {x: x is an odd natural number}
(ii) B = {x: x is an integer, (iii) C = {x: x is an integer, }
(iv) D = {x: x is a letter in the word LOYAL} (v) E = {x: x is a month of a year not having 31 days} Page 4 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(vi) F = {x: x is a consonant in the English alphabet which proceeds k}. Answer (i) A = {x: x is an odd natural number} = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9 }
(ii) B = {x: x is an integer;
It can be seen that B (iii) C = {x: x is an integer; It can be seen that
and
(1)2 = 1 4; (2)2 = 4 4; (3)2 = 9 > 4 02 = 0 4 12 = 1 4 22 = 4 4 32 = 9 > 4 C = {2, 1, 0, 1, 2} (iv) D = (x: x is a letter in the word LOYAL) = {L, O, Y, A} (v) E = {x: x is a month of a year not having 31 days} = {February, April, June, September, November} (vi) F = {x: x is a consonant in the English alphabet which precedes k} = {b, c, d, f, g, h, j}
Question 6: Match each of the set on the left in the roster form with the same set on the right described in set-builder form: (i) {1, 2, 3, 6} (ii) {2, 3} (iii) {M, A,T, H, E, I,C, S} (iv) {1, 3, 5, 7, 9} (a) {x: x is a prime number and a divisor of 6} (b) {x: x is an odd natural number less than 10} (c) {x: x is natural number and divisor of 6} (d) {x: x is a letter of the word MATHEMATICS}
Answer Page 5 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) All the elements of this set are natural numbers as well as the divisors of 6. Therefore, (i) matches with (c). (ii) It can be seen that 2 and 3 are prime numbers. They are also the divisors of 6. Therefore, (ii) matches with (a). (iii) All the elements of this set are letters of the word MATHEMATICS. Therefore, (iii) matches with (d). (iv) All the elements of this set are odd natural numbers less than 10. Therefore, (iv) matches with (b).
Page 6 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Exercise 1.2
Question 1: Which of the following are examples of the null set (i) Set of odd natural numbers divisible by 2 (ii) Set of even prime numbers (iii) {x:x is a natural numbers, x < 5 and x > 7 } (iv) {y:y is a point common to any two parallel lines} Answer (i) A set of odd natural numbers divisible by 2 is a null set because no odd number is divisible by 2. (ii) A set of even prime numbers is not a null set because 2 is an even prime number. (iii) {x: x is a natural number, x < 5 and x > 7} is a null set because a number cannot be simultaneously less than 5 and greater than 7. (iv) {y: y is a point common to any two parallel lines} is a null set because parallel lines do not intersect. Hence, they have no common point.
Question 2: Which of the following sets are finite or infinite (i) The set of months of a year (ii) {1, 2, 3 ...} (iii) {1, 2, 3 ... 99, 100} (iv) The set of positive integers greater than 100 (v) The set of prime numbers less than 99 Answer Page 7 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) The set of months of a year is a finite set because it has 12 elements. (ii) {1, 2, 3 } is an infinite set as it has infinite number of natural numbers. (iii) {1, 2, 3 99, 100} is a finite set because the numbers from 1 to 100 are finite in number. (iv) The set of positive integers greater than 100 is an infinite set because positive integers greater than 100 are infinite in number. (v) The set of prime numbers less than 99 is a finite set because prime numbers less than 99 are finite in number.
Question 3: State whether each of the following set is finite or infinite: (i) The set of lines which are parallel to the x-axis (ii) The set of letters in the English alphabet (iii) The set of numbers which are multiple of 5 (iv) The set of animals living on the earth (v) The set of circles passing through the origin (0, 0) Answer (i) The set of lines which are parallel to the x-axis is an infinite set because lines parallel to the x-axis are infinite in number. (ii) The set of letters in the English alphabet is a finite set because it has 26 elements. (iii) The set of numbers which are multiple of 5 is an infinite set because multiples of 5 are infinite in number. (iv) The set of animals living on the earth is a finite set because the number of animals living on the earth is finite (although it is quite a big number). (v) The set of circles passing through the origin (0, 0) is an infinite set because infinite number of circles can pass through the origin.
Question 4: In the following, state whether A = B or not: (i) A = {a, b, c, d}; B = {d, c, b, a} (ii) A = {4, 8, 12, 16}; B = {8, 4, 16, 18} (iii) A = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}; B = {x: x is positive even integer and x 10}
Page 8 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(iv) A = {x: x is a multiple of 10}; B = {10, 15, 20, 25, 30 ...} Answer (i) A = {a, b, c, d}; B = {d, c, b, a} The order in which the elements of a set are listed is not significant. A = B (ii) A = {4, 8, 12, 16}; B = {8, 4, 16, 18} It can be seen that 12 A but 12 B. A B (iii) A = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10} B = {x: x is a positive even integer and x 10} = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10} A = B (iv) A = {x: x is a multiple of 10} B = {10, 15, 20, 25, 30 } It can be seen that 15 B but 15 A. A B
Question 5: Are the following pair of sets equal? Give reasons. (i) A = {2, 3}; B = {x: x is solution of x2 + 5x + 6 = 0} (ii) A = {x: x is a letter in the word FOLLOW}; B = {y: y is a letter in the word WOLF} Answer (i) A = {2, 3}; B = {x: x is a solution of x2 + 5x + 6 = 0} The equation x2 + 5x + 6 = 0 can be solved as: x(x + 3) + 2(x + 3) = 0 (x + 2)(x + 3) = 0 x = 2 or x = 3
A = {2, 3}; B = {2, 3} A B (ii) A = {x: x is a letter in the word FOLLOW} = {F, O, L, W} B = {y: y is a letter in the word WOLF} = {W, O, L, F}
Page 9 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
The order in which the elements of a set are listed is not significant. A = B
Question 6: From the sets given below, select equal sets: A = {2, 4, 8, 12}, B = {1, 2, 3, 4}, C = {4, 8, 12, 14}, D = {3, 1, 4, 2} E = {1, 1}, F = {0, a}, G = {1, 1}, H = {0, 1} Answer A = {2, 4, 8, 12}; B = {1, 2, 3, 4}; C = {4, 8, 12, 14} D = {3, 1, 4, 2}; E = {1, 1}; F = {0, a} G = {1, 1}; A = {0, 1} It can be seen that 8 A, 8 B, 8 D, 8 E, 8 F, 8 G, 8 H A B, A D, A E, A F, A G, A H Also, 2 A, 2 C AC 3 B, 3 C, 3 E, 3 F, 3 G, 3 H B C, B E, B F, B G, B H 12 C, 12 D, 12 E, 12 F, 12 G, 12 H C D, C E, C F, C G, C H 4 D, 4 E, 4 F, 4 G, 4 H D E, D F, D G, D H Similarly, E F, E G, E H F G, F H, G H The order in which the elements of a set are listed is not significant. B = D and E = G Hence, among the given sets, B = D and E = G.
Page 10 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Exercise 1.3
Question 1: Make correct statements by filling in the symbols or in the blank spaces: (i) {2, 3, 4} {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} (ii) {a, b, c} {b, c, d} (iii) {x: x is a student of Class XI of your school} {x: x student of your school} (iv) {x: x is a circle in the plane} {x: x is a circle in the same plane with radius 1 unit} (v) {x: x is a triangle in a plane}{x: x is a rectangle in the plane} (vi) {x: x is an equilateral triangle in a plane} {x: x is a triangle in the same plane} (vii) {x: x is an even natural number} {x: x is an integer} Answer (i) (ii) (iii) {x: x is a student of class XI of your school} {x: x is student of your school} (iv) {x: x is a circle in the plane} {x: x is a circle in the same plane with radius 1 unit} (v) {x: x is a triangle in a plane} {x: x is a rectangle in the plane} (vi) {x: x is an equilateral triangle in a plane} {x: x in a triangle in the same plane} Page 11 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(vii) {x: x is an even natural number} {x: x is an integer}
Question 2: Examine whether the following statements are true or false: (i) {a, b} {b, c, a} (ii) {a, e} {x: x is a vowel in the English alphabet} (iii) {1, 2, 3} {1, 3, 5} (iv) {a} {a. b, c} (v) {a} (a, b, c) (vi) {x: x is an even natural number less than 6} {x: x is a natural number which divides 36} Answer (i) False. Each element of {a, b} is also an element of {b, c, a}. (ii) True. a, e are two vowels of the English alphabet. (iii) False. 2{1, 2, 3}; however, 2{1, 3, 5} (iv) True. Each element of {a} is also an element of {a, b, c}. (v) False. The elements of {a, b, c} are a, b, c. Therefore, {a}{a, b, c} (vi) True. {x:x is an even natural number less than 6} = {2, 4} {x:x is a natural number which divides 36}= {1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 18, 36}
Question 3: Let A= {1, 2, {3, 4,}, 5}. Which of the following statements are incorrect and why? (i) {3, 4} A (ii) {3, 4}} A (iii) {{3, 4}} A (iv) 1 A (v) 1 A (vi) {1, 2, 5} A (vii) {1, 2, 5} A (viii) {1, 2, 3} A (ix) A (x) A Page 12 of 44
Class XI (xi) {} A Answer A = {1, 2, {3, 4}, 5}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) The statement {3, 4} A is incorrect because 3 {3, 4}; however, 3A. (ii) The statement {3, 4} A is correct because {3, 4} is an element of A. (iii) The statement {{3, 4}} A is correct because {3, 4} {{3, 4}} and {3, 4} A. (iv) The statement 1A is correct because 1 is an element of A. (v) The statement 1 A is incorrect because an element of a set can never be a subset of itself. (vi) The statement {1, 2, 5} A is correct because each element of {1, 2, 5} is also an element of A. (vii) The statement {1, 2, 5} A is incorrect because {1, 2, 5} is not an element of A. (viii) The statement {1, 2, 3} A is incorrect because 3 {1, 2, 3}; however, 3 A. (ix) The statement A is incorrect because is not an element of A. (x) The statement A is correct because is a subset of every set. (xi) The statement {} A is incorrect because {}; however, A.
Question 4: Write down all the subsets of the following sets: (i) {a} (ii) {a, b} (iii) {1, 2, 3} (iv) Answer (i) The subsets of {a} are and {a}. (ii) The subsets of {a, b} are, {a}, {b}, and {a, b}. (iii) The subsets of {1, 2, 3} are, {1}, {2}, {3}, {1, 2}, {2, 3}, {1, 3}, and {1, 2, 3} (iv) The only subset of is.
Question 5: How many elements has P(A), if A = ? Page 13 of 44

Class XI Answer
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
We know that if A is a set with m elements i.e., n(A) = m, then n[P(A)] = 2m. If A = , then n(A) = 0. n[P(A)] = 20 = 1 Hence, P(A) has one element.
Question 6: Write the following as intervals: (i) {x: x R, 4 < x 6} (ii) {x: x R, 12 < x < 10} (iii) {x: x R, 0 x < 7} (iv) {x: x R, 3 x 4} Answer (i) {x: x R, 4 < x 6} = (4, 6] (ii) {x: x R, 12 < x < 10} = (12, 10) (iii) {x: x R, 0 x < 7} = [0, 7) (iv) {x: x R, 3 x 4} = [3, 4]
Question 7: Write the following intervals in set-builder form: (i) (3, 0) (ii) [6, 12] (iii) (6, 12] (iv) [23, 5) Answer (i) (3, 0) = {x: x R, 3 < x < 0} (ii) [6, 12] = {x: x R, 6 x 12} (iii) (6, 12] ={x: x R, 6 < x 12} (iv) [23, 5) = {x: x R, 23 x < 5}
Question 8: What universal set (s) would you propose for each of the following: Page 14 of 44
Class XI (i) The set of right triangles (ii) The set of isosceles triangles Answer
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) For the set of right triangles, the universal set can be the set of triangles or the set of polygons. (ii) For the set of isosceles triangles, the universal set can be the set of triangles or the set of polygons or the set of two-dimensional figures.
Question 9: Given the sets A = {1, 3, 5}, B = {2, 4, 6} and C = {0, 2, 4, 6, 8}, which of the following may be considered as universals set (s) for all the three sets A, B and C (i) {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) (iii) {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} (iv) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} Answer (i) It can be seen that A {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} B {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} However, C {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} Therefore, the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} cannot be the universal set for the sets A, B, and C. (ii) A , B , C Therefore, cannot be the universal set for the sets A, B, and C. (iii) A {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} B {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} C {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} Therefore, the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} is the universal set for the sets A, B, and C. (iv) A {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} B {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} However, C {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}
Page 15 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Therefore, the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} cannot be the universal set for the sets A, B, and C.
Exercise 1.4
Question 1: Find the union of each of the following pairs of sets: (i) X = {1, 3, 5} Y = {1, 2, 3} (ii) A = {a, e, i, o, u} B = {a, b, c} (iii) A = {x: x is a natural number and multiple of 3} B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6} (iv) A = {x: x is a natural number and 1 < x 6} B = {x: x is a natural number and 6 < x < 10} (v) A = {1, 2, 3}, B = Answer (i) X = {1, 3, 5} Y = {1, 2, 3} X Y= {1, 2, 3, 5} (ii) A = {a, e, i, o, u} B = {a, b, c} Page 16 of 44
Class XI A B = {a, b, c, e, i, o, u}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(iii) A = {x: x is a natural number and multiple of 3} = {3, 6, 9 } As B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6} = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} A B = {1, 2, 4, 5, 3, 6, 9, 12 } A B = {x: x = 1, 2, 4, 5 or a multiple of 3} (iv) A = {x: x is a natural number and 1 < x 6} = {2, 3, 4, 5, 6} B = {x: x is a natural number and 6 < x < 10} = {7, 8, 9} A B = {2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} A B = {x: x N and 1 < x < 10} (v) A = {1, 2, 3}, B = A B = {1, 2, 3}
Question 2: Let A = {a, b}, B = {a, b, c}. Is A B? What is A B? Answer Here, A = {a, b} and B = {a, b, c} Yes, A B. A B = {a, b, c} = B
Question 3: If A and B are two sets such that A B, then what is A B? Answer If A and B are two sets such that A B, then A B = B.
Question 4: If A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {3, 4, 5, 6}, C = {5, 6, 7, 8} and D = {7, 8, 9, 10}; find (i) A B (ii) A C (iii) B C (iv) B D (v) A B C (vi) A B D Page 17 of 44
Class XI (vii) B C D Answer
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
A = {1, 2, 3, 4], B = {3, 4, 5, 6}, C = {5, 6, 7, 8} and D = {7, 8, 9, 10} (i) A B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) A C = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} (iii) B C = {3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} (iv) B D = {3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} (v) A B C = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8} (vi) A B D = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} (vii) B C D = {3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
Question 5: Find the intersection of each pair of sets: (i) X = {1, 3, 5} Y = {1, 2, 3} (ii) A = {a, e, i, o, u} B = {a, b, c} (iii) A = {x: x is a natural number and multiple of 3} B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6} (iv) A = {x: x is a natural number and 1 < x 6} B = {x: x is a natural number and 6 < x < 10} (v) A = {1, 2, 3}, B = Answer (i) X = {1, 3, 5}, Y = {1, 2, 3} X Y = {1, 3} (ii) A = {a, e, i, o, u}, B = {a, b, c} A B = {a} (iii) A = {x: x is a natural number and multiple of 3} = (3, 6, 9 } B = {x: x is a natural number less than 6} = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} A B = {3} (iv) A = {x: x is a natural number and 1 < x 6} = {2, 3, 4, 5, 6} B = {x: x is a natural number and 6 < x < 10} = {7, 8, 9} AB= (v) A = {1, 2, 3}, B =
Page 18 of 44
Class XI AB=
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 6: If A = {3, 5, 7, 9, 11}, B = {7, 9, 11, 13}, C = {11, 13, 15} and D = {15, 17}; find (i) A B (ii) B C (iii) A C D (iv) A C (v) B D (vi) A (B C) (vii) A D (viii) A (B D) (ix) (A B) (B C) (x) (A D) (B C) Answer (i) A B = {7, 9, 11} (ii) B C = {11, 13} (iii) A C D = { A C} D = {11} {15, 17} = (iv) A C = {11} (v) B D = (vi) A (B C) = (A B) (A C) = {7, 9, 11} {11} = {7, 9, 11} (vii) A D = (viii) A (B D) = (A B) (A D) = {7, 9, 11} = {7, 9, 11} (ix) (A B) (B C) = {7, 9, 11} {7, 9, 11, 13, 15} = {7, 9, 11} (x) (A D) (B C) = {3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 15, 17) {7, 9, 11, 13, 15} = {7, 9, 11, 15}
Question 7: If A = {x: x is a natural number}, B ={x: x is an even natural number} C = {x: x is an odd natural number} and D = {x: x is a prime number}, find Page 19 of 44
Class XI (i) A B (ii) A C (iii) A D (iv) B C (v) B D (vi) C D Answer
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
A = {x: x is a natural number} = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5 } B ={x: x is an even natural number} = {2, 4, 6, 8 } C = {x: x is an odd natural number} = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9 } D = {x: x is a prime number} = {2, 3, 5, 7 } (i) A B = {x: x is a even natural number} = B (ii) A C = {x: x is an odd natural number} = C (iii) A D = {x: x is a prime number} = D (iv) B C = (v) B D = {2} (vi) C D = {x: x is odd prime number}
Question 8: Which of the following pairs of sets are disjoint (i) {1, 2, 3, 4} and {x: x is a natural number and 4 x 6} (ii) {a, e, i, o, u}and {c, d, e, f} (iii) {x: x is an even integer} and {x: x is an odd integer} Answer (i) {1, 2, 3, 4} {x: x is a natural number and 4 x 6} = {4, 5, 6} Now, {1, 2, 3, 4} {4, 5, 6} = {4} Therefore, this pair of sets is not disjoint. (ii) {a, e, i, o, u} (c, d, e, f} = {e} Therefore, {a, e, i, o, u} and (c, d, e, f} are not disjoint. (iii) {x: x is an even integer} {x: x is an odd integer} = Therefore, this pair of sets is disjoint.
Page 20 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 9: If A = {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21}, B = {4, 8, 12, 16, 20}, C = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16}, D = {5, 10, 15, 20}; find (i) A B (ii) A C (iii) A D (iv) B A (v) C A (vi) D A (vii) B C (viii) B D (ix) C B (x) D B (xi) C D (xii) D C Answer (i) A B = {3, 6, 9, 15, 18, 21} (ii) A C = {3, 9, 15, 18, 21} (iii) A D = {3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 21} (iv) B A = {4, 8, 16, 20} (v) C A = {2, 4, 8, 10, 14, 16} (vi) D A = {5, 10, 20} (vii) B C = {20} (viii) B D = {4, 8, 12, 16} (ix) C B = {2, 6, 10, 14} (x) D B = {5, 10, 15} (xi) C D = {2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16} (xii) D C = {5, 15, 20}
Question 10: If X = {a, b, c, d} and Y = {f, b, d, g}, find
Page 21 of 44
Class XI (i) X Y (ii) Y X (iii) X Y Answer (i) X Y = {a, c} (ii) Y X = {f, g} (iii) X Y = {b, d}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 11: If R is the set of real numbers and Q is the set of rational numbers, then what is R Q? Answer R: set of real numbers Q: set of rational numbers Therefore, R Q is a set of irrational numbers.
Question 12: State whether each of the following statement is true or false. Justify your answer. (i) {2, 3, 4, 5} and {3, 6} are disjoint sets. (ii) {a, e, i, o, u } and {a, b, c, d} are disjoint sets. (iii) {2, 6, 10, 14} and {3, 7, 11, 15} are disjoint sets. (iv) {2, 6, 10} and {3, 7, 11} are disjoint sets. Answer (i) False As 3 {2, 3, 4, 5}, 3 {3, 6} {2, 3, 4, 5} {3, 6} = {3} (ii) False As a {a, e, i, o, u}, a {a, b, c, d} {a, e, i, o, u } {a, b, c, d} = {a} (iii) True As {2, 6, 10, 14} {3, 7, 11, 15} = (iv) True As {2, 6, 10} {3, 7, 11} = Page 22 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Exercise 1.5
Question 1: Let U ={1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}, A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {2, 4, 6, 8} and C = {3, 4, 5, 6}. Find (i) (ii)
Page 23 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Answer U ={1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} A = {1, 2, 3, 4} B = {2, 4, 6, 8} C = {3, 4, 5, 6} (i) (ii) (iii)
(iv)
(v) (vi)
Question 2: If U = {a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h}, find the complements of the following sets: (i) A = {a, b, c} (ii) B = {d, e, f, g} Page 24 of 44
Class XI (iii) C = {a, c, e, g} (iv) D = {f, g, h, a} Answer U = {a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h} (i) A = {a, b, c}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(ii) B = {d, e, f, g}
(iii) C = {a, c, e, g}
(iv) D = {f, g, h, a}
Question 3: Taking the set of natural numbers as the universal set, write down the complements of the following sets: (i) {x: x is an even natural number} (ii) {x: x is an odd natural number} (iii) {x: x is a positive multiple of 3} (iv) {x: x is a prime number} (v) {x: x is a natural number divisible by 3 and 5} (vi) {x: x is a perfect square} (vii) {x: x is perfect cube} (viii) {x: x + 5 = 8} (ix) {x: 2x + 5 = 9} (x) {x: x 7} (xi) {x: x N and 2x + 1 > 10} Answer U = N: Set of natural numbers (i) {x: x is an even natural number} = {x: x is an odd natural number}
Page 25 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(ii) {x: x is an odd natural number} = {x: x is an even natural number} (iii) {x: x is a positive multiple of 3} = {x: x N and x is not a multiple of 3} (iv) {x: x is a prime number} ={x: x is a positive composite number and x = 1} (v) {x: x is a natural number divisible by 3 and 5} = {x: x is a natural number that is not divisible by 3 or 5} (vi) {x: x is a perfect square} = {x: x N and x is not a perfect square} (vii) {x: x is a perfect cube} = {x: x N and x is not a perfect cube} (viii) {x: x + 5 = 8} = {x: x N and x 3} (ix) {x: 2x + 5 = 9} = {x: x N and x 2} (x) {x: x 7} = {x: x N and x < 7} (xi) {x: x N and 2x + 1 > 10} = {x: x N and x 9/2}
Question 4: If U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6,7,8, 9}, A = {2, 4, 6, 8} and B = {2, 3, 5, 7}. Verify that (i) Answer U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} A = {2, 4, 6, 8}, B = {2, 3, 5, 7} (i) (ii)
(ii)
Question 5: Draw appropriate Venn diagram for each of the following: Page 26 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Answer (i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Page 27 of 44
Class XI Question 6:
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Let U be the set of all triangles in a plane. If A is the set of all triangles with at least one angle different from 60, what is Answer is the set of all equilateral triangles. ?
Question 7: Fill in the blanks to make each of the following a true statement: (i) (ii) A = (iii) (iv) Answer (i) (ii) A = U A = A A = A (iii) A A = (iv) U A = A = U A =
Exercise 1.6
Question 1: If X and Y are two sets such that n(X) = 17, n(Y) = 23 and n(X Y) = 38, find n(X Y). Answer
Page 28 of 44
Class XI It is given that:
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
n(X) = 17, n(Y) = 23, n(X Y) = 38 n(X Y) = ? We know that:
Question 2: If X and Y are two sets such that X Y has 18 elements, X has 8 elements and Y has 15 elements; how many elements does X Y have? Answer It is given that:
n(X f? Y) = ? We know that:
Question 3: In a group of 400 people, 250 can speak Hindi and 200 can speak English. How many people can speak both Hindi and English? Answer Let H be the set of people who speak Hindi, and E be the set of people who speak English n(H E) = 400, n(H) = 250, n(E) = 200 n(H E) = ? Page 29 of 44
Class XI We know that: n(H E) = n(H) + n(E) n(H E) 400 = 250 + 200 n(H E) 400 = 450 n(H E) n(H E) = 450 400 n(H E) = 50
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Thus, 50 people can speak both Hindi and English.
Question 4: If S and T are two sets such that S has 21 elements, T has 32 elements, and S T has 11 elements, how many elements does S T have? Answer It is given that: n(S) = 21, n(T) = 32, n(S T) = 11 We know that: n (S T) = n (S) + n (T) n (S T) n (S T) = 21 + 32 11 = 42 Thus, the set (S T) has 42 elements.
Question 5: If X and Y are two sets such that X has 40 elements, X Y has 60 elements and X Y has 10 elements, how many elements does Y have? Answer It is given that: n(X) = 40, n(X Y) = 60, n(X Y) = 10 We know that: n(X Y) = n(X) + n(Y) n(X Y) 60 = 40 + n(Y) 10 n(Y) = 60 (40 10) = 30 Thus, the set Y has 30 elements.
Question 6: Page 30 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
In a group of 70 people, 37 like coffee, 52 like tea, and each person likes at least one of the two drinks. How many people like both coffee and tea? Answer Let C denote the set of people who like coffee, and T denote the set of people who like tea n(C T) = 70, n(C) = 37, n(T) = 52 We know that: n(C T) = n(C) + n(T) n(C T) 70 = 37 + 52 n(C T) 70 = 89 n(C T) n(C T) = 89 70 = 19 Thus, 19 people like both coffee and tea.
Question 7: In a group of 65 people, 40 like cricket, 10 like both cricket and tennis. How many like tennis only and not cricket? How many like tennis? Answer Let C denote the set of people who like cricket, and T denote the set of people who like tennis n(C T) = 65, n(C) = 40, n(C T) = 10 We know that: n(C T) = n(C) + n(T) n(C T) 65 = 40 + n(T) 10 65 = 30 + n(T) n(T) = 65 30 = 35 Therefore, 35 people like tennis. Now, (T C) (T C) = T Also, (T C) (T C) = n (T) = n (T C) + n (T C) 35 = n (T C) + 10 Page 31 of 44
Class XI n (T C) = 35 10 = 25 Thus, 25 people like only tennis.
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 8: In a committee, 50 people speak French, 20 speak Spanish and 10 speak both Spanish and French. How many speak at least one of these two languages? Answer Let F be the set of people in the committee who speak French, and S be the set of people in the committee who speak Spanish n(F) = 50, n(S) = 20, n(S F) = 10 We know that: n(S F) = n(S) + n(F) n(S F) = 20 + 50 10 = 70 10 = 60 Thus, 60 people in the committee speak at least one of the two languages.
Text solution
Page 32 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 1: Decide, among the following sets, which sets are subsets of one and another: A = {x: x R and x satisfy x2 8x + 12 = 0}, B = {2, 4, 6}, C = {2, 4, 6, 8}, D = {6}. Answer A = {x: x R and x satisfies x2 8x + 12 = 0} 2 and 6 are the only solutions of x2 8x + 12 = 0. A = {2, 6} B = {2, 4, 6}, C = {2, 4, 6, 8 }, D = {6} DABC Hence, A B, A C, B C, D A, D B, D C
Question 2: In each of the following, determine whether the statement is true or false. If it is true, prove it. If it is false, give an example. (i) If x A and A B, then x B (ii) If A B and B C, then A C (iii) If A B and B C, then A C (iv) If A B and B C, then A C (v) If x A and A B, then x B (vi) If A B and x B, then x A Answer (i) False Let A = {1, 2} and B = {1, {1, 2}, {3}} Now, AB However, (ii) False Let
Page 33 of 44
Class XI As A B BC However, (iii) True Let A B and B C. Let x A
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
AC (iv) False Let Accordingly, However, A C (v) False Let A = {3, 5, 7} and B = {3, 4, 6} Now, 5 A and A B However, 5 B (vi) True Let A B and x B. To show: x A If possible, suppose x A. Then, x B, which is a contradiction as x B x A and .
Question 3: Let A, B and C be the sets such that A B = A C and A B = A C. show that B = C. Answer Let, A, B and C be the sets such that To show: B = C Let x B and .
Page 34 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Case I xA Also, x B
x A and x C xC BC Similarly, we can show that C B. B=C
Question 4: Show that the following four conditions are equivalent: (i) A B (ii) A B = (iii) A B = B (iv) A B = A Answer First, we have to show that (i) (ii). Let A B To show: A B If possible, suppose A B This means that there exists x A, x B, which is not possible as A B. AB= ABAB= Let A B = To show: A B Let x A Clearly, x B because if x B, then A B AB=AB Page 35 of 44
Class XI (i) (ii) Let A B To show: Clearly, Let
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Case I: x A
Case II: x B Then, Conversely, let Let x A
AB Hence, (i) (iii) Now, we have to show that (i) (iv). Let A B Clearly Let x A We have to show that As A B, x B Hence, A = A B Conversely, suppose A B = A Let x A Page 36 of 44
Class XI x A and x B xB AB Hence, (i) (iv).
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Question 5: Show that if A B, then C B C A. Answer Let A B To show: C B C A Let x C B x C and x B x C and x A [A B] xCA CBCA
Question 6: Assume that P (A) = P (B). Show that A = B. Answer Let P(A) = P(B) To show: A = B Let x A A P(A) = P(B) x C, for some C P(B) Now, C B xB AB Similarly, B A A=B
Question 7: Is it true that for any sets A and B, P (A) P (B) = P (A B)? Justify your answer. Page 37 of 44
Class XI Answer False Let A = {0, 1} and B = {1, 2} A B = {0, 1, 2} P(A) = {, {0}, {1}, {0, 1}} P(B) = {, {1}, {2}, {1, 2}}
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
P(A B) = {, {0}, {1}, {2}, {0, 1}, {1, 2}, {0, 2}, {0, 1, 2}} P(A) P(B) = {, {0}, {1}, {0, 1}, {2}, {1, 2}} P(A) P(B) P(A B)
Question 8: Show that for any sets A and B, A = (A B) (A B) and A (B A) = (A B) Answer To show: A = (A B) (A B) Let x A We have to show that x (A B) (A B) Case I xAB Then, x (A B) (A B) (A B) Case II xAB x A or x B x B [x A] x A B (A B) (A B) A (A B) (A B) (1) It is clear that A B A and (A B) A (A B) (A B) A (2) From (1) and (2), we obtain A = (A B) (A B) To prove: A (B A) A B Page 38 of 44
Class XI Let x A (B A) x A or x (B A) x A or (x B and x A)
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
(x A or x B) and (x A or x A) x (A B) A (B A) (A B) (3) Next, we show that (A B) A (B A). Let y A B y A or y B (y A or y B) and (y A or y A) y A or (y B and y A) y A (B A) A B A (B A) (4) Hence, from (3) and (4), we obtain A (B A) = A B.
Question 9: Using properties of sets show that (i) A (A B) = A (ii) A (A B) = A. Answer (i) To show: A (A B) = A We know that AA ABA A (A B) A (1) Also, A A (A B) (2) From (1) and (2), A (A B) = A (ii) To show: A (A B) = A A (A B) = (A A) (A B) = A (A B) = A {from (1)}

Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Show that A B = A C need not imply B = C. Answer Let A = {0, 1}, B = {0, 2, 3}, and C = {0, 4, 5} Accordingly, A B = {0} and A C = {0} Here, A B = A C = {0} However, B C [2 B and 2 C]
Question 11: Let A and B be sets. If A X = B X = and A X = B X for some set X, show that A = B. (Hints A = A (A X), B = B (B X) and use distributive law) Answer Let A and B be two sets such that A X = B X = f and A X = B X for some set X. To show: A = B It can be seen that A = A (A X) = A (B X) [A X = B X] = (A B) (A X) [Distributive law] = (A B) [A X = ] = A B (1) Now, B = B (B X) = B (A X) [A X = B X] = (B A) (B X) [Distributive law] = (B A) [B X = ] =BA = A B (2) Hence, from (1) and (2), we obtain A = B.
Question 12: Find sets A, B and C such that A B, B C and A C are non-empty sets and A B C = . Answer Let A = {0, 1}, B = {1, 2}, and C = {2, 0}. Page 40 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Accordingly, A B = {1}, B C = {2}, and A C = {0}. A B, B C, and A C are non-empty. However, A B C =
Question 13: In a survey of 600 students in a school, 150 students were found to be taking tea and 225 taking coffee, 100 were taking both tea and coffee. Find how many students were taking neither tea nor coffee? Answer Let U be the set of all students who took part in the survey. Let T be the set of students taking tea. Let C be the set of students taking coffee. Accordingly, n(U) = 600, n(T) = 150, n(C) = 225, n(T C) = 100 To find: Number of student taking neither tea nor coffee i.e., we have to find n(T' C'). n(T' C') = n(T C)' = n(U) n(T C) = n(U) [n(T) + n(C) n(T C)] = 600 [150 + 225 100] = 600 275 = 325 Hence, 325 students were taking neither tea nor coffee.
Question 14: In a group of students 100 students know Hindi, 50 know English and 25 know both. Each of the students knows either Hindi or English. How many students are there in the group? Answer Let U be the set of all students in the group. Let E be the set of all students who know English. Let H be the set of all students who know Hindi. HE=U Accordingly, n(H) = 100 and n(E) = 50
Page 41 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
= 25 n(U) = n(H) + = 100 + 50 25 = 125 Hence, there are 125 students in the group. n(H E)
Question 15: In a survey of 60 people, it was found that 25 people read newspaper H, 26 read newspaper T, 26 read newspaper I, 9 read both H and I,11 read both H and T, 8 read both T and I, 3 read all three newspapers. Find: (i) the number of people who read at least one of the newspapers. (ii) the number of people who read exactly one newspaper. Answer Let A be the set of people who read newspaper H. Let B be the set of people who read newspaper T. Let C be the set of people who read newspaper I. Accordingly, n(A) = 25, n(B) = 26, and n(C) = 26 n(A C) = 9, n(A B) = 11, and n(B C) = 8 n(A B C) = 3 Let U be the set of people who took part in the survey. (i) Accordingly, n(A B C) = n(A) + n(B) + n(C) n(A B) n(B C) n(C A) + n(A B C) = 25 + 26 + 26 11 8 9 + 3 = 52 Hence, 52 people read at least one of the newspapers. (ii) Let a be the number of people who read newspapers H and T only.
Page 42 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
Let b denote the number of people who read newspapers I and H only. Let c denote the number of people who read newspapers T and I only. Let d denote the number of people who read all three newspapers. Accordingly, d = n(A B C) = 3 Now, n(A B) = a + d n(B C) = c + d n(C A) = b + d a + d + c + d + b + d = 11 + 8 + 9 = 28 a + b + c + d = 28 2d = 28 6 = 22 Hence, (52 22) = 30 people read exactly one newspaper.
Question 16: In a survey it was found that 21 people liked product A, 26 liked product B and 29 liked product C. If 14 people liked products A and B, 12 people liked products C and A, 14 people liked products B and C and 8 liked all the three products. Find how many liked product C only. Answer Let A, B, and C be the set of people who like product A, product B, and product C respectively. Accordingly, n(A) = 21, n(B) = 26, n(C) = 29, n(A B) = 14, n(C A) = 12, n(B C) = 14, n(A B C) = 8 The Venn diagram for the given problem can be drawn as
Page 43 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 1 Sets
Maths
It can be seen that number of people who like product C only is {29 (4 + 8 + 6)} = 11
Page 44 of 44
Class XI
Chapter 2 Relations and Functions
Maths
Exercise 2.1
Question 1:
If Answer
, find the values of x and y.
It is given that . Since the ordered pairs are equal, the corresponding elements will also be equal. Therefore, and .
x = 2 and y = 1 Question 2: If the set A has 3 elements and the set B = {3, 4, 5}, then find the number of elements in (A B)? Answer It is given that set A has 3 elements and the elements of set B are 3, 4, and 5. Number of elements in set B = 3 Number of elements in (A B) = (Number of elements in A) (Number of elements in B) =33=9 Thus, the number of elements in (A B) is 9. Question 3: If G = {7, 8} and H = {5, 4, 2}, find G H and H G. Answer G = {7, 8} and H = {5, 4, 2} We know that the Cartesian product P Q of two non-empty sets P and Q is defined as P Q = {(p, q): p P, q Q} G H = {(7, 5), (7, 4), (7, 2), (8, 5), (8, 4), (8, 2)} H G = {(5, 7), (5, 8), (4, 7), (4, 8), (2, 7), (2, 8)} Question 4: State whether each of the following statement are true or false. If the statement is false, rewrite the given statement correctly.
Page 1 of 14
Class XI
Maths
(i) If P = {m, n} and Q = {n, m}, then P Q = {(m, n), (n, m)}. (ii) If A and B are non-empty sets, then A B is a non-empty set of ordered pairs (x, y) such that x A and y B. (iii) If A = {1, 2}, B = {3, 4}, then A (B ) = . Answer (i) False If P = {m, n} and Q = {n, m}, then P Q = {(m, m), (m, n), (n, m), (n, n)} (ii) True (iii) True Question 5: If A = {1, 1}, find A A A. Answer It is known that for any non-empty set A, A A A is defined as A A A = {(a, b, c): a, b, c A} It is given that A = {1, 1} A A A = {(1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1)} Question 6: If A B = {(a, x), (a, y), (b, x), (b, y)}. Find A and B. Answer It is given that A B = {(a, x), (a, y), (b, x), (b, y)} We know that the Cartesian product of two non-empty sets P and Q is defined as P Q = {(p, q): p P, q Q} A is the set of all first elements and B is the set of all second elements. Thus, A = {a, b} and B = {x, y} Question 7: Let A = {1, 2}, B = {1, 2, 3, 4}, C = {5, 6} and D = {5, 6, 7, 8}. Verify that (i) A (B C) = (A B) (A C) (ii) A C is a subset of B D Answer (i) To verify: A (B C) = (A B) (A C) We have B C = {1, 2, 3, 4} {5, 6} = L.H.S. = A (B C) = A = A B = {(1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (2, 4)} A C = {(1, 5), (1, 6), (2, 5), (2, 6)} R.H.S. = (A B) (A C) = L.H.S. = R.H.S Hence, A (B C) = (A B) (A C) (ii) To verify: A C is a subset of B D A C = {(1, 5), (1, 6), (2, 5), (2, 6)} B D = {(1, 5), (1, 6), (1, 7), (1, 8), (2, 5), (2, 6), (2, 7), (2, 8), (3, 5), (3, 6), (3, 7), (3, 8), (4, 5), (4, 6), (4, 7), (4, 8)} We can observe that all the elements of set A C are the elements of set B D. Therefore, A C is a subset of B D.
Page 2 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Let A = {1, 2} and B = {3, 4}. Write A B. How many subsets will A B have? List them. Answer A = {1, 2} and B = {3, 4} A B = {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)} n(A B) = 4 We know that if C is a set with n(C) = m, then n[P(C)] = 2m. Therefore, the set A B has 24 = 16 subsets. These are , {(1, 3)}, {(1, 4)}, {(2, 3)}, {(2, 4)}, {(1, 3), (1, 4)}, {(1, 3), (2, 3)}, {(1, 3), (2, 4)}, {(1, 4), (2, 3)}, {(1, 4), (2, 4)}, {(2, 3), (2, 4)}, {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3)}, {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 4)}, {(1, 3), (2, 3), (2, 4)}, {(1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}, {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)} Question 9: Let A and B be two sets such that n(A) = 3 and n (B) = 2. If (x, 1), (y, 2), (z, 1) are in A B, find A and B, where x, y and z are distinct elements. Answer It is given that n(A) = 3 and n(B) = 2; and (x, 1), (y, 2), (z, 1) are in A B. We know that A = Set of first elements of the ordered pair elements of A B B = Set of second elements of the ordered pair elements of A B. x, y, and z are the elements of A; and 1 and 2 are the elements of B. Since n(A) = 3 and n(B) = 2, it is clear that A = {x, y, z} and B = {1, 2}. Question 10: The Cartesian product A A has 9 elements among which are found (1, 0) and (0, 1). Find the set A and the remaining elements of A A. Answer We know that if n(A) = p and n(B) = q, then n(A B) = pq. n(A A) = n(A) n(A) It is given that n(A A) = 9 n(A) n(A) = 9 n(A) = 3 The ordered pairs (1, 0) and (0, 1) are two of the nine elements of A A. We know that A A = {(a, a): a A}. Therefore, 1, 0, and 1 are elements of A. Since n(A) = 3, it is clear that A = {1, 0, 1}. The remaining elements of set A A are (1, 1), (1, 1), (0, 1), (0, 0), (1, 1), (1, 0), and (1, 1)
Page 3 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 2.2
Question 1: Let A = {1, 2, 3, , 14}. Define a relation R from A to A by R = {(x, y): 3x y = 0, where x, y A}. Write down its domain, codomain and range. Answer The relation R from A to A is given as R = {(x, y): 3x y = 0, where x, y A} i.e., R = {(x, y): 3x = y, where x, y A} R = {(1, 3), (2, 6), (3, 9), (4, 12)} The domain of R is the set of all first elements of the ordered pairs in the relation. Domain of R = {1, 2, 3, 4} The whole set A is the codomainof the relation R. Codomain of R = A = {1, 2, 3, , 14} The range of R is the set of all second elements of the ordered pairs in the relation. Range of R = {3, 6, 9, 12} Question 2: Define a relation R on the set N of natural numbers by R = {(x, y): y = x + 5, x is a natural number less than 4; x, y N}. Depict this relationship using roster form. Write down the domain and the range. Answer R = {(x, y): y = x + 5, x is a natural number less than 4, x, y N} The natural numbers less than 4 are 1, 2, and 3. R = {(1, 6), (2, 7), (3, 8)} The domain of R is the set of all first elements of the ordered pairs in the relation. Domain of R = {1, 2, 3} The range of R is the set of all second elements of the ordered pairs in the relation. Range of R = {6, 7, 8} Question 3: A = {1, 2, 3, 5} and B = {4, 6, 9}. Define a relation R from A to B by R = {(x, y): the difference between x and y is odd; x A, y B}. Write R in roster form. Answer A = {1, 2, 3, 5} and B = {4, 6, 9} R = {(x, y): the difference between x and y is odd; x A, y B} R = {(1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 9), (3, 4), (3, 6), (5, 4), (5, 6)} Question 4: The given figure shows a relationship between the sets P and Q. write this relation (i) in set-builder form (ii) in roster form. What is its domain and range?
Page 4 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Answer According to the given figure, P = {5, 6, 7}, Q = {3, 4, 5} (i) R = {(x, y): y = x 2; x P} or R = {(x, y): y = x 2 for x = 5, 6, 7} (ii) R = {(5, 3), (6, 4), (7, 5)} Domain of R = {5, 6, 7} Range of R = {3, 4, 5} Question 5: Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}. Let R be the relation on A defined by {(a, b): a, b A, b is exactly divisible by a}. (i) Write R in roster form (ii) Find the domain of R (iii) Find the range of R. Answer A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}, R = {(a, b): a, b A, b is exactly divisible by a} (i) R = {(1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 2), (2, 4), (2, 6), (3, 3), (3, 6), (4, 4), (6, 6)} (ii) Domain of R = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6} (iii) Range of R = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6} Question 6: Determine the domain and range of the relation R defined by R = {(x, x + 5): x {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}}. Answer R = {(x, x + 5): x {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}} R = {(0, 5), (1, 6), (2, 7), (3, 8), (4, 9), (5, 10)} Domain of R = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5} Range of R = {5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} Question 7: Write the relation R = {(x, x3): x is a prime number less than 10} in roster form. Answer R = {(x, x3): x is a prime number less than 10} The prime numbers less than 10 are 2, 3, 5, and 7. R = {(2, 8), (3, 27), (5, 125), (7, 343)} Question 8: Let A = {x, y, z} and B = {1, 2}. Find the number of relations from A to B. Answer It is given that A = {x, y, z} and B = {1, 2}. A B = {(x, 1), (x, 2), (y, 1), (y, 2), (z, 1), (z, 2)} Since n(A B) = 6, the number of subsets of A B is 26. Page 5 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the number of relations from A to B is 26. Question 9: Let R be the relation on Z defined by R = {(a, b): a, b Z, a b is an integer}. Find the domain and range of R. Answer R = {(a, b): a, b Z, a b is an integer} It is known that the difference between any two integers is always an integer. Domain of R = Z Range of R = Z
Page 6 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 2.3
Question 1: Which of the following relations are functions? Give reasons. If it is a function, determine its domain and range. (i) {(2, 1), (5, 1), (8, 1), (11, 1), (14, 1), (17, 1)} (ii) {(2, 1), (4, 2), (6, 3), (8, 4), (10, 5), (12, 6), (14, 7)} (iii) {(1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 5)} Answer (i) {(2, 1), (5, 1), (8, 1), (11, 1), (14, 1), (17, 1)} Since 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, and 17 are the elements of the domain of the given relation having their unique images, this relation is a function. Here, domain = {2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17} and range = {1} (ii) {(2, 1), (4, 2), (6, 3), (8, 4), (10, 5), (12, 6), (14, 7)} Since 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 are the elements of the domain of the given relation having their unique images, this relation is a function. Here, domain = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14} and range = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7} (iii) {(1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 5)} Since the same first element i.e., 1 corresponds to two different images i.e., 3 and 5, this relation is not a function. Question 2: Find the domain and range of the following real function: (i) f(x) = |x| (ii) Answer (i) f(x) = |x|, x R
We know that |x| =
Since f(x) is defined for x R, the domain of f is R. It can be observed that the range of f(x) = |x| is all real numbers except positive real numbers. The range of f is ( , 0]. (ii) Since is defined for all real numbers that are greater than or equal to 3 and less than or equal to 3, the domain of f(x) is {x : 3 x 3} or [3, 3]. For any value of x such that 3 x 3, the value of f(x) will lie between 0 and 3. The range of f(x) is {x: 0 x 3} or [0, 3]. Question 3: A function f is defined by f(x) = 2x 5. Write down the values of (i) f(0), (ii) f(7), (iii) f(3) Page 7 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Answer The given function is f(x) = 2x 5. Therefore, (i) f(0) = 2 0 5 = 0 5 = 5 (ii) f(7) = 2 7 5 = 14 5 = 9 (iii) f(3) = 2 (3) 5 = 6 5 = 11 Question 4: The function t which maps temperature in degree Celsius into temperature in degree Fahrenheit is defined by . Find (i) t (0) (ii) t (28) (iii) t (10) (iv) The value of C, when t(C) = 212 Answer The given function is Therefore, (i) (ii) .
(iii) (iv) It is given that t(C) = 212
Thus, the value of t, when t(C) = 212, is 100. Question 5: Find the range of each of the following functions. (i) f(x) = 2 3x, x R, x > 0. (ii) f(x) = x2 + 2, x, is a real number. (iii) f(x) = x, x is a real number Answer (i) f(x) = 2 3x, x R, x > 0
Page 8 of 14
Class XI
Maths
The values of f(x) for various values of real numbers x > 0 can be written in the tabular form as x f(x) 0.01 1.97 0.1 1.7 0.9 0.7 1 1 2 4 2.5 5.5 4 10 5 13
Thus, it can be clearly observed that the range of f is the set of all real numbers less than 2. i.e., range of f = ( , 2) Alter: Let x > 0 3x > 0 2 3x < 2 f(x) < 2 Range of f = ( , 2) (ii) f(x) = x2 + 2, x, is a real number The values of f(x) for various values of real numbers x can be written in the tabular form as x f(x) 0 2 0.3 2.09 0.8 2.64 1 3 2 6 3 11 ..
Thus, it can be clearly observed that the range of f is the set of all real numbers greater than 2. i.e., range of f = [2, ) Alter: Let x be any real number. Accordingly, x2 0 x2 + 2 0 + 2 x2 + 2 2 f(x) 2 Range of f = [2, ) (iii) f(x) = x, x is a real number It is clear that the range of f is the set of all real numbers. Range of f = R
Text solution
Page 9 of 14
Maths
The relation f is defined by
The relation g is defined by Show that f is a function and g is not a function. Answer
The relation f is defined as It is observed that for 0 x < 3, f(x) = x2 3 < x 10, f(x) = 3x Also, at x = 3, f(x) = 32 = 9 or f(x) = 3 3 = 9 i.e., at x = 3, f(x) = 9 Therefore, for 0 x 10, the images of f(x) are unique. Thus, the given relation is a function.
The relation g is defined as It can be observed that for x = 2, g(x) = 22 = 4 and g(x) = 3 2 = 6 Hence, element 2 of the domain of the relation g corresponds to two different images i.e., 4 and 6. Hence, this relation is not a function. Question 2:
If f(x) = x2, find Answer
Question 3:
Find the domain of the function Answer
The given function is
Page 10 of 14
Class XI
Maths
It can be seen that function f is defined for all real numbers except at x = 6 and x = 2. Hence, the domain of f is R {2, 6}. Question 4: Find the domain and the range of the real function f defined by Answer The given real function is It can be seen that . is defined for (x 1) 0. .
i.e., is defined for x 1. Therefore, the domain of f is the set of all real numbers greater than or equal to 1 i.e., the domain of f = [1, ). As x 1 (x 1) 0 Therefore, the range of f is the set of all real numbers greater than or equal to 0 i.e., the range of f = [0, ). Question 5: Find the domain and the range of the real function f defined by f (x) = |x 1|. Answer The given real function is f (x) = |x 1|. It is clear that |x 1| is defined for all real numbers. Domain of f = R Also, for x R, |x 1| assumes all real numbers. Hence, the range of f is the set of all non-negative real numbers. Question 6:
Let Answer
be a function from R into R. Determine the range of f.
The range of f is the set of all second elements. It can be observed that all these elements are greater than or equal to 0 but less than 1. [Denominator is greater numerator] Thus, range of f = [0, 1)
Question 7:
Page 11 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Let f, g: R R be defined, respectively by f(x) = x + 1, g(x) = 2x 3. Find f + g, f g and . Answer f, g: R R is defined as f(x) = x + 1, g(x) = 2x 3 (f + g) (x) = f(x) + g(x) = (x + 1) + (2x 3) = 3x 2 (f + g) (x) = 3x 2 (f g) (x) = f(x) g(x) = (x + 1) (2x 3) = x + 1 2x + 3 = x + 4 (f g) (x) = x + 4
Question 8: Let f = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (0, 1), (1, 3)} be a function from Z to Z defined by f(x) = ax + b, for some integers a, b. Determine a, b. Answer f = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (0, 1), (1, 3)} f(x) = ax + b (1, 1) f f(1) = 1 a1+b=1 a+b=1 (0, 1) f f(0) = 1 a 0 + b = 1 b = 1 On substituting b = 1 in a + b = 1, we obtain a + (1) = 1 a = 1 + 1 = 2. Thus, the respective values of a and b are 2 and 1. Question 9: Let R be a relation from N to N defined by R = {(a, b): a, b N and a = b2}. Are the following true? (i) (a, a) R, for all a N (ii) (a, b) R, implies (b, a) R (iii) (a, b) R, (b, c) R implies (a, c) R. Justify your answer in each case. Answer R = {(a, b): a, b N and a = b2} (i) It can be seen that 2 N;however, 2 22 = 4. Therefore, the statement (a, a) R, for all a N is not true. (ii) It can be seen that (9, 3) N because 9, 3 N and 9 = 32. Now, 3 92 = 81; therefore, (3, 9) N Page 12 of 14
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the statement (a, b) R, implies (b, a) R is not true. (iii) It can be seen that (9, 3) R, (16, 4) R because 9, 3, 16, 4 N and 9 = 32 and 16 = 42. Now, 9 42 = 16; therefore, (9, 4) N Therefore, the statement (a, b) R, (b, c) R implies (a, c) R is not true. Question 10: Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {1, 5, 9, 11, 15, 16} and f = {(1, 5), (2, 9), (3, 1), (4, 5), (2, 11)}. Are the following true? (i) f is a relation from A to B (ii) f is a function from A to B. Justify your answer in each case. Answer A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {1, 5, 9, 11, 15, 16} A B = {(1, 1), (1, 5), (1, 9), (1, 11), (1, 15), (1, 16), (2, 1), (2, 5), (2, 9), (2, 11), (2, 15), (2, 16), (3, 1), (3, 5), (3, 9), (3, 11), (3, 15), (3, 16), (4, 1), (4, 5), (4, 9), (4, 11), (4, 15), (4, 16)} It is given that f = {(1, 5), (2, 9), (3, 1), (4, 5), (2, 11)} (i) A relation from a non-empty set A to a non-empty set B is a subset of the Cartesian product A B. It is observed that f is a subset of A B. Thus, f is a relation from A to B. (ii) Since the same first element i.e., 2 corresponds to two different images i.e., 9 and 11, relation f is not a function. Question 11: Let f be the subset of Z Z defined by f = {(ab, a + b): a, b Z}. Is f a function from Z to Z: justify your answer. Answer The relation f is defined as f = {(ab, a + b): a, b Z} We know that a relation f from a set A to a set B is said to be a function if every element of set A has unique images in set B. Since 2, 6, 2, 6 Z, (2 6, 2 + 6), (2 6, 2 + (6)) f i.e., (12, 8), (12, 8) f It can be seen that the same first element i.e., 12 corresponds to two different images i.e., 8 and 8. Thus, relation f is not a function. Question 12: Let A = {9, 10, 11, 12, 13} and let f: A N be defined by f(n) = the highest prime factor of n. Find the range of f. Answer A = {9, 10, 11, 12, 13} f: A N is defined as f(n) = The highest prime factor of n Prime factor of 9 = 3 Prime factors of 10 = 2, 5 Prime factor of 11 = 11 Prime factors of 12 = 2, 3 Prime factor of 13 = 13 f(9) = The highest prime factor of 9 = 3 Page 13 of 14
Class XI
Maths
f(10) = The highest prime factor of 10 = 5 f(11) = The highest prime factor of 11 = 11 f(12) = The highest prime factor of 12 = 3 f(13) = The highest prime factor of 13 = 13 The range of f is the set of all f(n), where n A. Range of f = {3, 5, 11, 13}
Page 14 of 14
Class XI
Chapter 3 Trigonometric Functions
Maths
Exercise 3.1
Question 1: Find the radian measures corresponding to the following degree measures: (i) 25 (ii) 47 30' (iii) 240 (iv) 520 Answer (i) 25 We know that 180 = radian
(ii) 47 30'
47 30' =
degree [1 = 60']
degree Since 180 = radian
(iii) 240 We know that 180 = radian
(iv) 520 We know that 180 = radian
Question 2: Find the degree measures corresponding to the following radian measures
Page 1 of 44 Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
(i)
(ii) 4 (iii)
(iv)
Answer
(i) We know that radian = 180
(ii) 4 We know that radian = 180
(iii) We know that radian = 180
Class XI
Maths
(iv) We know that radian = 180
Question 3: A wheel makes 360 revolutions in one minute. Through how many radians does it turn in one second? Answer Number of revolutions made by the wheel in 1 minute = 360
Number of revolutions made by the wheel in 1 second = In one complete revolution, the wheel turns an angle of 2 radian. Hence, in 6 complete revolutions, it will turn an angle of 6 2 radian, i.e., 12 radian Thus, in one second, the wheel turns an angle of 12 radian.
Question 4: Find the degree measure of the angle subtended at the centre of a circle of radius 100
cm by an arc of length 22 cm Answer
We know that in a circle of radius r unit, if an arc of length l unit subtends an angle radian at the centre, then
Therefore, forr = 100 cm, l = 22 cm, we have
Thus, the required angle is 1236.

Class XI
Maths
Question 5: In a circle of diameter 40 cm, the length of a chord is 20 cm. Find the length of minor arc of the chord. Answer Diameter of the circle = 40 cm
Radius (r) of the circle = Let AB be a chord (length = 20 cm) of the circle.
In OAB, OA = OB = Radius of circle = 20 cm Also, AB = 20 cm Thus, OAB is an equilateral triangle.
= 60 = We know that in a circle of radius r unit, if an arc of length l unit subtends an angle
radian at the centre, then
Thus, the length of the minor arc of the chord is
Question 6: If in two circles, arcs of the same length subtend angles 60 and 75 at the centre, find the ratio of their radii. Answer
Class XI
Chapter 3 Trigonometric Functions and
Maths
Let the radii of the two circles be
. Let an arc of length l subtend an angle of 60
at the centre of the circle of radius r1, while let an arc of length l subtend an angle of 75 at the centre of the circle of radius r2.
Now, 60 =
and 75 =
We know that in a circle of radius r unit, if an arc of length l unit subtends an angle
radian at the centre, then
Thus, the ratio of the radii is 5:4.
Question 7: Find the angle in radian though which a pendulum swings if its length is 75 cm and the tip describes an arc of length (i) 10 cm (ii) 15 cm (iii) 21 cm Answer We know that in a circle of radius r unit, if an arc of length l unit subtends an angle
radian at the centre, then It is given that r = 75 cm (i) Here, l = 10 cm
(ii) Here, l = 15 cm
Class XI (iii) Here, l = 21 cm
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 3.2
Question 1:
Find the values of other five trigonometric functions if quadrant. Answer
, x lies in third
Since x lies in the 3rd quadrant, the value of sin x will be negative.
Class XI
Maths
Question 2:
, x lies in second
Since x lies in the 2nd quadrant, the value of cos x will be negative
Class XI
Maths
Question 3:
Find the values of other five trigonometric functions if Answer
, x lies in third quadrant.
Since x lies in the 3rd quadrant, the value of sec x will be negative.
Class XI
Maths
Question 4:
, x lies in fourth
Since x lies in the 4th quadrant, the value of sin x will be negative.
Class XI
Maths
Question 5:
, x lies in second
Class XI
Maths
Since x lies in the 2nd quadrant, the value of sec x will be negative.
sec x =
Question 6: Find the value of the trigonometric function sin 765 Answer It is known that the values of sin x repeat after an interval of 2 or 360.
Question 7: Find the value of the trigonometric function cosec (1410) Answer It is known that the values of cosec x repeat after an interval of 2 or 360.
Question 8:
Class XI
Maths
Find the value of the trigonometric function Answer It is known that the values of tan x repeat after an interval of or 180.
Question 9:
Find the value of the trigonometric function Answer It is known that the values of sin x repeat after an interval of 2 or 360.
Question 10:
Find the value of the trigonometric function Answer It is known that the values of cot x repeat after an interval of or 180.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 3.3
Question 1:
Answer
L.H.S. =
Question 2:
Prove that
Class XI Answer
Maths
L.H.S. =
Question 3:
Prove that Answer
L.H.S. =
Question 4:
Prove that Answer
L.H.S =
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Find the value of: (i) sin 75 (ii) tan 15 Answer (i) sin 75 = sin (45 + 30) = sin 45 cos 30 + cos 45 sin 30 [sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y]
(ii) tan 15 = tan (45 30)
Class XI
Maths
Question 6:
Prove that: Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 7:
Prove that: Answer
It is known that
L.H.S. =
Question 8:
Prove that Answer
Question 9:
Class XI
Maths
Answer
L.H.S. =
Question 10: Prove that sin (n + 1)x sin (n + 2)x + cos (n + 1)x cos (n + 2)x = cos x Answer L.H.S. = sin (n + 1)x sin(n + 2)x + cos (n + 1)x cos(n + 2)x
Question 11:
Prove that Answer
Class XI
Maths
It is known that
L.H.S. =
Question 12: Prove that sin2 6x sin2 4x = sin 2x sin 10x Answer It is known that
L.H.S. = sin26x sin24x = (sin 6x + sin 4x) (sin 6x sin 4x)
= (2 sin 5x cos x) (2 cos 5x sin x) = (2 sin 5x cos 5x) (2 sin x cos x) = sin 10x sin 2x
Class XI = R.H.S.
Maths
Question 13: Prove that cos2 2x cos2 6x = sin 4x sin 8x Answer It is known that
L.H.S. = cos2 2x cos2 6x = (cos 2x + cos 6x) (cos 2x 6x)
= [2 cos 4x cos 2x] [2 sin 4x (sin 2x)] = (2 sin 4x cos 4x) (2 sin 2x cos 2x) = sin 8x sin 4x = R.H.S.
Question 14: Prove that sin 2x + 2sin 4x + sin 6x = 4cos2 x sin 4x Answer L.H.S. = sin 2x + 2 sin 4x + sin 6x = [sin 2x + sin 6x] + 2 sin 4x
= 2 sin 4x cos ( 2x) + 2 sin 4x = 2 sin 4x cos 2x + 2 sin 4x = 2 sin 4x (cos 2x + 1) = 2 sin 4x (2 cos2 x 1 + 1) = 2 sin 4x (2 cos2 x)
Class XI = 4cos2 x sin 4x = R.H.S.
Maths
Question 15: Prove that cot 4x (sin 5x + sin 3x) = cot x (sin 5x sin 3x) Answer L.H.S = cot 4x (sin 5x + sin 3x)
= 2 cos 4x cos x R.H.S. = cot x (sin 5x sin 3x)
= 2 cos 4x. cos x L.H.S. = R.H.S.
Question 16:
Prove that Answer It is known that
Class XI
Maths
L.H.S =
Question 17:
L.H.S. =
Question 18:
Prove that
Class XI Answer It is known that
Maths
L.H.S. =
Question 19:
L.H.S. =
Class XI
Maths
Question 20:
L.H.S. =
Question 21:
Prove that Answer
L.H.S. =
Class XI
Maths
Question 22: Prove that cot x cot 2x cot 2x cot 3x cot 3x cot x = 1 Answer L.H.S. = cot x cot 2x cot 2x cot 3x cot 3x cot x = cot x cot 2x cot 3x (cot 2x + cot x) = cot x cot 2x cot (2x + x) (cot 2x + cot x)
= cot x cot 2x (cot 2x cot x 1) = 1 = R.H.S.
Question 23:
Prove that Answer
It is known that
.
Page 26 of 44
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com
Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
L.H.S. = tan 4x = tan 2(2x)
Question 24: Prove that cos 4x = 1 8sin2 x cos2 x Answer L.H.S. = cos 4x = cos 2(2x) = 1 2 sin2 2x [cos 2A = 1 2 sin2 A] = 1 2(2 sin x cos x)2 [sin2A = 2sin A cosA] = 1 8 sin2x cos2x = R.H.S.
Maths
Prove that: cos 6x = 32 cos6 x 48 cos4 x + 18 cos2 x 1 Answer L.H.S. = cos 6x = cos 3(2x) = 4 cos3 2x 3 cos 2x [cos 3A = 4 cos3 A 3 cos A] = 4 [(2 cos2 x 1)3 3 (2 cos2 x 1) [cos 2x = 2 cos2 x 1] = 4 [(2 cos2 x)3 (1)3 3 (2 cos2 x)2 + 3 (2 cos2 x)] 6cos2 x + 3 = 4 [8cos6x 1 12 cos4x + 6 cos2x] 6 cos2x + 3 = 32 cos6x 4 48 cos4x + 24 cos2 x 6 cos2x + 3 = 32 cos6x 48 cos4x + 18 cos2x 1 = R.H.S.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 3.4
Question 1: Find the principal and general solutions of the equation Answer
Therefore, the principal solutions are x =
and
Therefore, the general solution is
and
Class XI
Maths
, where n Z
and
Question 4: Find the general solution of cosec x = 2 Answer cosec x = 2
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Find the general solution of the equation Answer
Maths
Find the general solution of the equation Answer
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
NCERT Miscellaneous Solution
Question 1: Prove that: Answer L.H.S.
= 0 = R.H.S
Question 2: Prove that: (sin 3x + sin x) sin x + (cos 3x cos x) cos x = 0 Answer L.H.S. = (sin 3x + sin x) sin x + (cos 3x cos x) cos x
Class XI
Maths
= RH.S.
Question 3:
Prove that: Answer L.H.S. =
Question 4:
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Prove that: Answer
It is known that L.H.S. =
Question 6:
Prove that: Answer

Class XI It is known that
Maths
L.H.S. =
= tan 6x = R.H.S.
Question 7:
Class XI
Maths
Question 8:
, x in quadrant II Answer Here, x is in quadrant II.
i.e.,
Therefore,
are all positive.
Class XI
Maths
As x is in quadrant II, cosx is negative.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the respective values of
are
Question 9:
Find Answer Here, x is in quadrant III.
for
, x in quadrant III
Therefore,
and
are negative, whereas
is positive.
Class XI
Maths
Now,
are
Question 10:
Find Answer Here, x is in quadrant II.
for
, x in quadrant II
Therefore,
, and
are all positive.
Class XI
Maths
[cosx is negative in quadrant II]
Class XI
Maths
are
Class XI
Chapter 4 Principle of Mathematical Induction
Maths
Exercise 4.1
Question 1: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N:
Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e.,
P(n): 1 + 3 + 32 + + 3n1 = For n = 1, we have
P(1): 1 =
, which is true.
Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider 1 + 3 + 32 + + 3k1 + 3(k+1) 1 = (1 + 3 + 32 + + 3k1) + 3k
Class XI
Maths
Thus, P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Hence, by the principle of mathematical induction, statement P(n) is true for all natural numbers i.e., n.
P(n): For n = 1, we have
P(1): 13 = 1 =
, which is true.
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider 13 + 23 + 33 + + k3 + (k + 1)3
Class XI
Maths
= (13 + 23 + 33 + . + k3) + (k + 1)3
P(1): 1 =
which is true.

Class XI
Maths
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider
Question 4: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: 1.2.3
+ 2.3.4 + + n(n + 1) (n + 2) = Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e.,
P(n): 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + + n(n + 1) (n + 2) = For n = 1, we have
P(1): 1.2.3 = 6 = Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
, which is true.
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + + k(k + 1) (k + 2)

Class XI
Maths
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + + k(k + 1) (k + 2) + (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3) = {1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + + k(k + 1) (k + 2)} + (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3)
P(n) : For n = 1, we have
P(1): 1.3 = 3
, which is true.
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true.

Class XI Consider
Maths
1.3 + 2.32 + 3.33 + + k3k+ (k + 1) 3k+1 = (1.3 + 2.32 + 3.33 + + k.3k) + (k + 1) 3k+1
P(1):
, which is true.
Page 6 of 27
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider 1.2 + 2.3 + 3.4 + + k.(k + 1) + (k + 1).(k + 2) = [1.2 + 2.3 + 3.4 + + k.(k + 1)] + (k + 1).(k + 2)
, which is true. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
Class XI
Maths
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider (1.3 + 3.5 + 5.7 + + (2k 1) (2k + 1) + {2(k + 1) 1}{2(k + 1) + 1}
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: 1.2 + 2.22 + 3.22 + + n.2n = (n 1) 2n+1 + 2 Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n): 1.2 + 2.22 + 3.22 + + n.2n = (n 1) 2n+1 + 2 For n = 1, we have P(1): 1.2 = 2 = (1 1) 21+1 + 2 = 0 + 2 = 2, which is true. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., 1.2 + 2.22 + 3.22 + + k.2k = (k 1) 2k + 1 + 2 (i) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true. Consider
P(n):
Class XI For n = 1, we have
Maths
P(1):
, which is true.

Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
For n = 1, we have
Thus, P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.

Class XI
Maths
Hence, by the principle of mathematical induction, statement P(n) is true for all natural numbers i.e., n.
For n = 1, we have
Thus, P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
Class XI
Maths
Hence, by the principle of mathematical induction, statement P(n) is true for all natural numbers i.e., n.
For n = 1, we have
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
For n = 1, we have
Class XI
Maths
Question 18:
Class XI
Maths
Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N:
It can be noted that P(n) is true for n = 1 since Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Hence, Thus, P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Hence, by the principle of mathematical induction, statement P(n) is true for all natural numbers i.e., n.
Question 19:
Class XI
Maths
Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: n (n + 1) (n + 5) is a multiple of 3. Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n): n (n + 1) (n + 5), which is a multiple of 3. It can be noted that P(n) is true for n = 1 since 1 (1 + 1) (1 + 5) = 12, which is a multiple of 3. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., k (k + 1) (k + 5) is a multiple of 3. k (k + 1) (k + 5) = 3m, where m N (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Question 20: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: 102n 1 + 1 is divisible by 11. Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e.,
Class XI
Maths
P(n): 102n 1 + 1 is divisible by 11. It can be observed that P(n) is true for n = 1 since P(1) = 102.1 1 + 1 = 11, which is divisible by 11. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., 102k 1 + 1 is divisible by 11. 102k 1 + 1 = 11m, where m N (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Question 21: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: x2n y2n is divisible by x + y. Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n): x2n y2n is divisible by x + y. It can be observed that P(n) is true for n = 1. This is so because x2 1 y2 1 = x2 y2 = (x + y) (x y) is divisible by (x + y). Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
Class XI
Maths
x2k y2k is divisible by x + y. x2k y2k = m (x + y), where m N (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Question 22: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: 32n + 2 8n 9 is divisible by 8. Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n): 32n + 2 8n 9 is divisible by 8. It can be observed that P(n) is true for n = 1 since 32 1 + 2 8 1 9 = 64, which is divisible by 8. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., 32k + 2 8k 9 is divisible by 8. 32k + 2 8k 9 = 8m; where m N (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Class XI
Maths
Question 23: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n N: 41n 14n is a multiple of 27. Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n):41n 14nis a multiple of 27. It can be observed that P(n) is true for n = 1 since 27. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., 41k 14kis a multiple of 27 41k 14k = 27m, where m N (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider , which is a multiple of
Class XI
Maths
Question 24: Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all (2n +7) < (n + 3)2 Answer Let the given statement be P(n), i.e., P(n): (2n +7) < (n + 3)2 It can be observed that P(n) is true for n = 1 since 2.1 + 7 = 9 < (1 + 3)2 = 16, which is true. Let P(k) be true for some positive integer k, i.e., (2k + 7) < (k + 3)2 (1) We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Consider
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Chapter 5 Complex Numbers and Quadratic Equations
Maths
Exercise 5.1
Question 1:
Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: Answer
Question 2: Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: i9 + i19 Answer
Question 3: Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: i39 Answer
Page 1 of 34
Maths
Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: 3(7 + i7) + i(7 + i7) Answer
Question 5: Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: (1 i) (1 + i6) Answer
Question 6:
Question 7:
Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: Answer Page 2 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: (1 i)4 Answer
Question 9: Express the given complex number in the form a + ib: Answer
Page 3 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 10:
Question 11: Find the multiplicative inverse of the complex number 4 3i
Page 4 of 34
Class XI Answer Let z = 4 3i Then,
Maths
= 4 + 3i and
Therefore, the multiplicative inverse of 4 3i is given by
Question 12: Find the multiplicative inverse of the complex number Answer Let z =
Therefore, the multiplicative inverse of
is given by
Question 13: Find the multiplicative inverse of the complex number i Answer Let z = i
Therefore, the multiplicative inverse of i is given by
Question 14:
Page 5 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Express the following expression in the form of a + ib.
Answer
Page 6 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 5.2
Question 1: Find the modulus and the argument of the complex number Answer
On squaring and adding, we obtain
Since both the values of sin and cos are negative and sin and cos are negative in III quadrant,
Thus, the modulus and argument of the complex number respectively.
are 2 and
Question 2:
Page 7 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Find the modulus and the argument of the complex number Answer
Thus, the modulus and argument of the complex number respectively.
are 2 and
Question 3: Convert the given complex number in polar form: 1 i Answer 1i Let r cos = 1 and r sin = 1 On squaring and adding, we obtain
Page 8 of 34
Class XI
Maths
This is the required polar form.
Question 4: Convert the given complex number in polar form: 1 + i Answer 1+i Let r cos = 1 and r sin = 1 On squaring and adding, we obtain
It can be written,
Page 9 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Convert the given complex number in polar form: 1 i Answer 1i Let r cos = 1 and r sin = 1 On squaring and adding, we obtain
Question 6: Convert the given complex number in polar form: 3 Answer 3 Let r cos = 3 and r sin = 0 On squaring and adding, we obtain
Page 10 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Convert the given complex number in polar form: Answer
Let r cos =
and r sin = 1
Page 11 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Convert the given complex number in polar form: i Answer i Let r cos = 0 and r sin = 1 On squaring and adding, we obtain
Page 12 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 5.3
Question 1: Solve the equation x2 + 3 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is x2 + 3 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 1, b = 0, and c = 3 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 02 4 1 3 = 12 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 2: Solve the equation 2x2 + x + 1 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is 2x2 + x + 1 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 2, b = 1, and c = 1 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 12 4 2 1 = 1 8 = 7 Therefore, the required solutions are Page 13 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: Solve the equation x2 + 3x + 9 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is x2 + 3x + 9 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 1, b = 3, and c = 9 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 32 4 1 9 = 9 36 = 27 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 4: Solve the equation x2 + x 2 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is x2 + x 2 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 1, b = 1, and c = 2 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 12 4 (1) (2) = 1 8 = 7 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 5: Solve the equation x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain Page 14 of 34
Class XI
Maths
a = 1, b = 3, and c = 5 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 32 4 1 5 =9 20 = 11 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 6: Solve the equation x2 x + 2 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is x2 x + 2 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 1, b = 1, and c = 2 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = (1)2 4 1 2 = 1 8 = 7 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 7: Solve the equation Answer The given quadratic equation is On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a= , b = 1, and c =
Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = 12 = 1 8 = 7
Therefore, the required solutions are
Page 15 of 34
Maths
Solve the equation Answer The given quadratic equation is On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a= ,b= , and c =
Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 9:
Solve the equation Answer
The given quadratic equation is This equation can also be written as On comparing this equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a= ,b= , and c = 1
Page 16 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 10:
The given quadratic equation is This equation can also be written as On comparing this equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a= , b = 1, and c =
Page 17 of 34
Class XI
Maths
NCERT Miscellaneous Solutions

Question 1:
Evaluate: Answer
Page 18 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 2: For any two complex numbers z1 and z2, prove that Re (z1z2) = Re z1 Re z2 Im z1 Im z2 Answer
Page 19 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 3:
Reduce Answer
to the standard form.
Page 20 of 34
Maths
If x iy = Answer
prove that
Page 21 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Convert the following in the polar form:
(i) Answer
, (ii)
(i) Here,
Let r cos = 1 and r sin = 1 Page 22 of 34

Class XI
Maths
On squaring and adding, we obtain r2 (cos2 + sin2 ) = 1 + 1 r2 (cos2 + sin2 ) = 2 r2 = 2 [cos2 + sin2 = 1]
z = r cos + i r sin
(ii) Here,
Let r cos = 1 and r sin = 1 On squaring and adding, we obtain r2 (cos2 + sin2 ) = 1 + 1 r2 (cos2 + sin2 ) = 2 r2 = 2 [cos2 + sin2 = 1]
Page 23 of 34
Class XI
Maths
z = r cos + i r sin
Question 6:
The given quadratic equation is This equation can also be written as On comparing this equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 9, b = 12, and c = 20 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = (12)2 4 9 20 = 144 720 = 576 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 7:
Solve the equation Answer Page 24 of 34

Class XI
Maths
The given quadratic equation is This equation can also be written as On comparing this equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 2, b = 4, and c = 3 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = (4)2 4 2 3 = 16 24 = 8 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 8: Solve the equation 27x2 10x + 1 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is 27x2 10x + 1 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain a = 27, b = 10, and c = 1 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = (10)2 4 27 1 = 100 108 = 8 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 9: Solve the equation 21x2 28x + 10 = 0 Answer The given quadratic equation is 21x2 28x + 10 = 0 On comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0, we obtain
Page 25 of 34
Class XI
Maths
a = 21, b = 28, and c = 10 Therefore, the discriminant of the given equation is D = b2 4ac = (28)2 4 21 10 = 784 840 = 56 Therefore, the required solutions are
Question 10:
If Answer
find
Question 11:
Page 26 of 34
Class XI
Maths
If a + ib = Answer
, prove that a2 + b2 =
On comparing real and imaginary parts, we obtain
Hence, proved.
Question 12: Let . Find
Page 27 of 34
Class XI
Maths
(i) Answer
, (ii)
(i)
On multiplying numerator and denominator by (2 i), we obtain
On comparing real parts, we obtain
(ii) On comparing imaginary parts, we obtain
Question 13:
Find the modulus and argument of the complex number Answer
Let
, then
Page 28 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the modulus and argument of the given complex number are respectively.
Question 14: Find the real numbers x and y if (x iy) (3 + 5i) is the conjugate of 6 24i. Answer Let
It is given that,
Page 29 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Equating real and imaginary parts, we obtain
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 5 and then adding them, we obtain
Putting the value of x in equation (i), we obtain
Thus, the values of x and y are 3 and 3 respectively.
Question 15:
Find the modulus of Answer
Question 16:
Page 30 of 34
Class XI
Maths
If (x + iy)3 = u + iv, then show that Answer
On equating real and imaginary parts, we obtain
Hence, proved. Question 17:
If and are different complex numbers with Answer Let = a + ib and = x + iy It is given that,
= 1, then find
Page 31 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Question 18: Find the number of non-zero integral solutions of the equation Answer .
Page 32 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Thus, 0 is the only integral solution of the given equation. Therefore, the number of nonzero integral solutions of the given equation is 0.
Question 19: If (a + ib) (c + id) (e + if) (g + ih) = A + iB, then show that (a2 + b2) (c2 + d2) (e2 + f2) (g2 + h2) = A2 + B2. Answer
On squaring both sides, we obtain (a2 + b2) (c2 + d2) (e2 + f2) (g2 + h2) = A2 + B2 Hence, proved.
Question 20:
If Answer
, then find the least positive integral value of m.
Page 33 of 34
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the least positive integer is 1. Thus, the least positive integral value of m is 4 (= 4 1).
Page 34 of 34
Class XI
Chapter 6 Linear Inequalities
Maths
Exercise 6.1
Question 1: Solve 24x < 100, when (i) x is a natural number (ii) x is an integer Answer The given inequality is 24x < 100.
(i) It is evident that 1, 2, 3, and 4 are the only natural numbers less than
Thus, when x is a natural number, the solutions of the given inequality are 1, 2, 3, and 4. Hence, in this case, the solution set is {1, 2, 3, 4}.
(ii) The integers less than
are 3, 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Thus, when x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are 3, 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. Hence, in this case, the solution set is {3, 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4}.
Question 2: Solve 12x > 30, when (i) x is a natural number (ii) x is an integer Answer The given inequality is 12x > 30.
(i) There is no natural number less than
Class XI
Maths
Thus, when x is a natural number, there is no solution of the given inequality.
(ii) The integers less than
are , 5, 4, 3.
Thus, when x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are , 5, 4, 3. Hence, in this case, the solution set is {, 5, 4, 3}.
Question 3: Solve 5x 3 < 7, when (i) x is an integer (ii) x is a real number Answer The given inequality is 5x 3 < 7.
(i) The integers less than 2 are , 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1. Thus, when x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are , 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1. Hence, in this case, the solution set is {, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1}. (ii) When x is a real number, the solutions of the given inequality are given by x < 2, that is, all real numbers x which are less than 2. Thus, the solution set of the given inequality is x (, 2).
Question 4: Solve 3x + 8 > 2, when (i) x is an integer (ii) x is a real number Answer The given inequality is 3x + 8 > 2.
Class XI
Maths
(i) The integers greater than 2 are 1, 0, 1, 2, Thus, when x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are 1, 0, 1, 2 Hence, in this case, the solution set is {1, 0, 1, 2, }. (ii) When x is a real number, the solutions of the given inequality are all the real numbers, which are greater than 2. Thus, in this case, the solution set is ( 2, ).
Question 5: Solve the given inequality for real x: 4x + 3 < 5x + 7 Answer 4x + 3 < 5x + 7 4x + 3 7 < 5x + 7 7 4x 4 < 5x 4x 4 4x < 5x 4x 4 < x Thus, all real numbers x,which are greater than 4, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (4, ).
Question 6: Solve the given inequality for real x: 3x 7 > 5x 1 Answer 3x 7 > 5x 1 3x 7 + 7 > 5x 1 + 7 3x > 5x + 6 3x 5x > 5x + 6 5x
Class XI 2x > 6
Maths
Thus, all real numbers x,which are less than 3, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (, 3).
Question 7: Solve the given inequality for real x: 3(x 1) 2 (x 3) Answer 3(x 1) 2(x 3) 3x 3 2x 6 3x 3 + 3 2x 6 + 3 3x 2x 3 3x 2x 2x 3 2x x3 Thus, all real numbers x,which are less than or equal to 3, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (, 3].
Question 8: Solve the given inequality for real x: 3(2 x) 2(1 x) Answer 3(2 x) 2(1 x) 6 3x 2 2x 6 3x + 2x 2 2x + 2x 6x2 6x626 x 4 x4 Thus, all real numbers x,which are less than or equal to 4, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (, 4].
Class XI
Maths
Question 9:
Solve the given inequality for real x: Answer
Question 10:
Class XI
Maths
Question 11:
Thus, all real numbers x,which are less than or equal to 2, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (, 2].
Question 12:
Class XI
Maths
Question 13: Solve the given inequality for real x: 2(2x + 3) 10 < 6 (x 2) Answer
Thus, all real numbers x,which are greater than or equal to 4, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is [4, ).
Question 14: Solve the given inequality for real x: 37 (3x + 5) 9x 8(x 3) Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 15:
Thus, all real numbers x,which are greater than 4, are the solutions of the given inequality. Hence, the solution set of the given inequality is (4, ).
Question 16:
Solve the given inequality for real x:

Class XI Answer
Maths
Question 17: Solve the given inequality and show the graph of the solution on number line: 3x 2 < 2x +1 Answer 3x 2 < 2x +1 3x 2x < 1 + 2 x<3 The graphical representation of the solutions of the given inequality is as follows.
Question 18: Solve the given inequality and show the graph of the solution on number line: 5x 3 3x 5 Answer
Class XI
Maths
The graphical representation of the solutions of the given inequality is as follows.
Question 19: Solve the given inequality and show the graph of the solution on number line: 3(1 x) < 2 (x + 4) Answer
Question 20: Solve the given inequality and show the graph of the solution on number line:
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 21: Ravi obtained 70 and 75 marks in first two unit test. Find the minimum marks he should get in the third test to have an average of at least 60 marks. Answer Let x be the marks obtained by Ravi in the third unit test. Since the student should have an average of at least 60 marks,
Thus, the student must obtain a minimum of 35 marks to have an average of at least 60 marks.
Maths
To receive Grade A in a course, one must obtain an average of 90 marks or more in five examinations (each of 100 marks). If Sunitas marks in first four examinations are 87, 92, 94 and 95, find minimum marks that Sunita must obtain in fifth examination to get grade A in the course. Answer Let x be the marks obtained by Sunita in the fifth examination. In order to receive grade A in the course, she must obtain an average of 90 marks or more in five examinations. Therefore,
Thus, Sunita must obtain greater than or equal to 82 marks in the fifth examination.
Question 23: Find all pairs of consecutive odd positive integers both of which are smaller than 10 such that their sum is more than 11. Answer Let x be the smaller of the two consecutive odd positive integers. Then, the other integer is x + 2. Since both the integers are smaller than 10, x + 2 < 10 x < 10 2 x < 8 (i) Also, the sum of the two integers is more than 11. x + (x + 2) > 11 2x + 2 > 11 2x > 11 2
Class XI 2x > 9
Maths
From (i) and (ii), we obtain
Since x is an odd number, x can take the values, 5 and 7. Thus, the required possible pairs are (5, 7) and (7, 9).
Question 24: Find all pairs of consecutive even positive integers, both of which are larger than 5 such that their sum is less than 23. Answer Let x be the smaller of the two consecutive even positive integers. Then, the other integer is x + 2. Since both the integers are larger than 5, x > 5 ... (1) Also, the sum of the two integers is less than 23. x + (x + 2) < 23 2x + 2 < 23 2x < 23 2 2x < 21
From (1) and (2), we obtain 5 < x < 10.5. Since x is an even number, x can take the values, 6, 8, and 10. Thus, the required possible pairs are (6, 8), (8, 10), and (10, 12).
Question 25: The longest side of a triangle is 3 times the shortest side and the third side is 2 cm shorter than the longest side. If the perimeter of the triangle is at least 61 cm, find the minimum length of the shortest side. Answer
Class XI
Maths
Let the length of the shortest side of the triangle be x cm. Then, length of the longest side = 3x cm Length of the third side = (3x 2) cm Since the perimeter of the triangle is at least 61 cm,
Thus, the minimum length of the shortest side is 9 cm.
Question 26: A man wants to cut three lengths from a single piece of board of length 91 cm. The second length is to be 3 cm longer than the shortest and the third length is to be twice as long as the shortest. What are the possible lengths of the shortest board if the third piece is to be at least 5 cm longer than the second? [Hint: If x is the length of the shortest board, then x, (x + 3) and 2x are the lengths of the second and third piece, respectively. Thus, x = (x + 3) + 2x 91 and 2x (x + 3) + 5] Answer Let the length of the shortest piece be x cm. Then, length of the second piece and the third piece are (x + 3) cm and 2x cm respectively. Since the three lengths are to be cut from a single piece of board of length 91 cm, x cm + (x + 3) cm + 2x cm 91 cm 4x + 3 91 4x 91 3 4x 88
Also, the third piece is at least 5 cm longer than the second piece.
Class XI 2x (x + 3) + 5 2x x + 8 x 8 (2) From (1) and (2), we obtain 8 x 22
Maths
Thus, the possible length of the shortest board is greater than or equal to 8 cm but less than or equal to 22 cm.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 6.2
Question 1: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: x + y < 5 Answer The graphical representation of x + y = 5 is given as dotted line in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes, I and II. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 0 + 0 < 5 or, 0 < 5, which is true Therefore, half plane II is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line does not satisfy the given strict inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the shaded half plane I excluding the points on the line. This can be represented as follows.
Question 2: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: 2x + y 6 Answer The graphical representation of 2x + y = 6 is given in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes, I and II.
Class XI
Maths
Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 2(0) + 0 6 or 0 6, which is false Therefore, half plane I is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line satisfies the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the shaded half plane II including the points on the line. This can be represented as follows.
Question 3: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: 3x + 4y 12 Answer 3x + 4y 12 The graphical representation of 3x + 4y = 12 is given in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes, I and II. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 3(0) + 4(0) 12 or 0 12, which is true Therefore, half plane II is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line satisfies the given inequality.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the shaded half plane I including the points on the line. This can be represented as follows.
Question 4: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: y + 8 2x Answer The graphical representation of y + 8 = 2x is given in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 0 + 8 2(0) or 8 0, which is true Therefore, lower half plane is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line satisfies the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the half plane containing the point (0, 0) including the line. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: x y 2 Answer The graphical representation of x y = 2 is given in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 0 0 2 or 0 2, which is true Therefore, the lower half plane is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is clear that any point on the line satisfies the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the half plane containing the point (0, 0) including the line. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: 2x 3y > 6 Answer The graphical representation of 2x 3y = 6 is given as dotted line in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 2(0) 3(0) > 6 or 0 > 6, which is false Therefore, the upper half plane is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is clear that any point on the line does not satisfy the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the half plane that does not contain the point (0, 0) excluding the line. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: 3x + 2y 6 Answer The graphical representation of 3x + 2y = 6 is given in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 3(0) + 2(0) 6 or 0 6, which is true Therefore, the lower half plane is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line satisfies the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the half plane containing the point (0, 0) including the line. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Question 8: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: 3y 5x < 30 Answer The graphical representation of 3y 5x = 30 is given as dotted line in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes.
Class XI
Maths
Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 3(0) 5(0) < 30 or 0 < 30, which is true Therefore, the upper half plane is not the solution region of the given inequality. Also, it is evident that any point on the line does not satisfy the given inequality. Thus, the solution region of the given inequality is the half plane containing the point (0, 0) excluding the line. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Question 9: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: y < 2 Answer The graphical representation of y = 2 is given as dotted line in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that,
Class XI 0 < 2, which is false
Maths
Also, it is evident that any point on the line does not satisfy the given inequality. Hence, every point below the line, y = 2 (excluding all the points on the line), determines the solution of the given inequality. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Question 10: Solve the given inequality graphically in two-dimensional plane: x > 3 Answer The graphical representation of x = 3 is given as dotted line in the figure below. This line divides the xy-plane in two half planes. Select a point (not on the line), which lies in one of the half planes, to determine whether the point satisfies the given inequality or not. We select the point as (0, 0). It is observed that, 0 > 3, which is true Also, it is evident that any point on the line does not satisfy the given inequality. Hence, every point on the right side of the line, x = 3 (excluding all the points on the line), determines the solution of the given inequality. The solution region is represented by the shaded region as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 6.3
Question 1: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x 3, y 2 Answer x 3 (1) y 2 (2) The graph of the lines, x = 3 and y = 2, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region on the right hand side of the line, x = 3 (including the line x = 3), and inequality (2) represents the region above the line, y = 2 (including the line y = 2). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Question 2: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 3x + 2y 12, x 1, y 2 Answer 3x + 2y 12 (1) x 1 (2) y 2 (3) The graphs of the lines, 3x + 2y = 12, x = 1, and y = 2, are drawn in the figure below.
Class XI
Maths
Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 3x + 2y = 12 (including the line 3x + 2y = 12). Inequality (2) represents the region on the right side of the line, x = 1 (including the line x = 1). Inequality (3) represents the region above the line, y = 2 (including the line y = 2). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Question 3: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 2x + y 6, 3x + 4y 12 Answer 2x + y 6 (1) 3x + 4y 12 (2) The graph of the lines, 2x + y= 6 and 3x + 4y = 12, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region above the line, 2x + y= 6 (including the line 2x + y= 6), and inequality (2) represents the region below the line, 3x + 4y =12 (including the line 3x + 4y =12). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 4: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x + y 4, 2x y > 0 Answer x + y 4 (1) 2x y > 0 (2) The graph of the lines, x + y = 4 and 2x y = 0, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region above the line, x + y = 4 (including the line x + y = 4). It is observed that (1, 0) satisfies the inequality, 2x y > 0. [2(1) 0 = 2 > 0] Therefore, inequality (2) represents the half plane corresponding to the line, 2x y = 0, containing the point (1, 0) [excluding the line 2x y > 0]. Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on line x + y = 4 and excluding the points on line 2x y = 0 as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 2x y > 1, x 2y < 1 Answer 2x y > 1 (1) x 2y < 1 (2) The graph of the lines, 2x y = 1 and x 2y = 1, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 2x y = 1 (excluding the line 2x y = 1), and inequality (2) represents the region above the line, x 2y = 1 (excluding the line x 2y = 1). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region excluding the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x + y 6, x + y 4 Answer x + y 6 (1) x + y 4 (2) The graph of the lines, x + y = 6 and x + y = 4, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, x + y = 6 (including the line x + y = 6), and inequality (2) represents the region above the line, x + y = 4 (including the line x + y = 4). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 2x + y 8, x + 2y 10 Answer 2x + y= 8 (1) x + 2y = 10 (2) The graph of the lines, 2x + y= 8 and x + 2y = 10, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region above the line, 2x + y = 8, and inequality (2) represents the region above the line, x + 2y = 10. Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x + y 9, y > x, x 0 Answer x+y9 y>x x0 ... (1) ... (2) ... (3)
The graph of the lines, x + y= 9 and y = x, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, x + y = 9 (including the line x + y = 9). It is observed that (0, 1) satisfies the inequality, y > x. [1 > 0] Therefore, inequality (2) represents the half plane corresponding to the line, y = x, containing the point (0, 1) [excluding the line y = x]. Inequality (3) represents the region on the right hand side of the line, x = 0 or y-axis (including y-axis). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the lines, x + y = 9 and x = 0, and excluding the points on line y = x as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 9: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 5x + 4y 20, x 1, y 2 Answer 5x + 4y 20 (1) x 1 (2) y 2 (3) The graph of the lines, 5x + 4y = 20, x = 1, and y = 2, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 5x + 4y = 20 (including the line 5x + 4y = 20). Inequality (2) represents the region on the right hand side of the line, x = 1 (including the line x = 1). Inequality (3) represents the region above the line, y = 2 (including the line y = 2). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 10: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 3x + 4y 60, x + 3y 30, x 0, y0 Answer 3x + 4y 60 (1) x + 3y 30 (2) The graph of the lines, 3x + 4y = 60 and x + 3y = 30, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 3x + 4y = 60 (including the line 3x + 4y = 60), and inequality (2) represents the region below the line, x + 3y = 30 (including the line x + 3y = 30). Since x 0 and y 0, every point in the common shaded region in the first quadrant including the points on the respective line and the axes represents the solution of the given system of linear inequalities.
Class XI
Maths
Question 11: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 2x + y 4, x + y 3, 2x 3y 6 Answer 2x + y 4 (1) x + y 3 (2) 2x 3y 6 (3) The graph of the lines, 2x + y= 4, x + y = 3, and 2x 3y = 6, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region above the line, 2x + y= 4 (including the line 2x + y= 4). Inequality (2) represents the region below the line, x + y = 3 (including the line x + y = 3). Inequality (3) represents the region above the line, 2x 3y = 6 (including the line 2x 3y = 6). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 12: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x 2y 3, 3x + 4y 12, x 0, y 1 Answer x 2y 3 (1) 3x + 4y 12 (2) y 1 (3) The graph of the lines, x 2y = 3, 3x + 4y = 12, and y = 1, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region above the line, x 2y = 3 (including the line x 2y = 3). Inequality (2) represents the region above the line, 3x + 4y = 12 (including the line 3x + 4y = 12). Inequality (3) represents the region above the line, y = 1 (including the line y = 1). The inequality, x 0, represents the region on the right hand side of y-axis (including yaxis). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines and y- axis as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 13: [[Q]] Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 4x + 3y 60, y 2x, x 3, x, y 0 Answer 4x + 3y 60 (1) y 2x (2) x 3 (3) The graph of the lines, 4x + 3y = 60, y = 2x, and x = 3, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 4x + 3y = 60 (including the line 4x + 3y = 60). Inequality (2) represents the region above the line, y = 2x (including the line y = 2x). Inequality (3) represents the region on the right hand side of the line, x = 3 (including the line x = 3). Hence, the solution of the given system of linear inequalities is represented by the common shaded region including the points on the respective lines as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 14: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: 3x + 2y 150, x + 4y 80, x 15, y 0, x 0 Answer 3x + 2y 150 (1) x + 4y 80 (2) x 15 (3) The graph of the lines, 3x + 2y = 150, x + 4y = 80, and x = 15, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, 3x + 2y = 150 (including the line 3x + 2y = 150). Inequality (2) represents the region below the line, x + 4y = 80 (including the line x + 4y = 80). Inequality (3) represents the region on the left hand side of the line, x = 15 (including the line x = 15).
Class XI
Maths
Since x 0 and y 0, every point in the common shaded region in the first quadrant including the points on the respective lines and the axes represents the solution of the given system of linear inequalities.
Question 15: Solve the following system of inequalities graphically: x + 2y 10, x + y 1, x y 0, x 0, y 0 Answer x + 2y 10 (1) x + y 1 (2) x y 0 (3) The graph of the lines, x + 2y = 10, x + y = 1, and x y = 0, are drawn in the figure below. Inequality (1) represents the region below the line, x + 2y = 10 (including the line x + 2y = 10). Inequality (2) represents the region above the line, x + y = 1 (including the line x + y = 1). Inequality (3) represents the region above the line, x y = 0 (including the line x y = 0).
Class XI
Maths
Since x 0 and y 0, every point in the common shaded region in the first quadrant including the points on the respective lines and the axes represents the solution of the given system of linear inequalities.
Class XI
Maths
NCERT Miscellaneous Solution

Question 1: Solve the inequality 2 3x 4 5 Answer 2 3x 4 5 2 + 4 3x 4 + 4 5 + 4 6 3x 9 2x3 Thus, all the real numbers, x, which are greater than or equal to 2 but less than or equal to 3, are the solutions of the given inequality. The solution set for the given inequalityis [2, 3].
Question 2: Solve the inequality 6 3(2x 4) < 12 Answer 6 3(2x 4) < 12 2 (2x 4) < 4 2 2x 4 > 4 4 2 2x > 4 4 2 2x > 0 1 x > 0 Thus, the solution set for the given inequalityis (0, 1].
Question 3:
Solve the inequality Answer
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the solution set for the given inequalityis [4, 2].
Question 4:
75 < 3(x 2) 0 25 < x 2 0 25 + 2 < x 2 23 < x 2 Thus, the solution set for the given inequalityis (23, 2].
Question 5:
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the solution set for the given inequalityis
Question 6:
Thus, the solution set for the given inequalityis
Question 7: Solve the inequalities and represent the solution graphically on number line: 5x + 1 > 24, 5x 1 < 24 Answer 5x + 1 > 24 5x > 25
Class XI x > 5 (1) 5x 1 < 24 5x < 25 x < 5 (2)
Maths
From (1) and (2), it can be concluded that the solution set for the given system of inequalities is (5, 5). The solution of the given system of inequalities can be represented on number line as
Question 8: Solve the inequalities and represent the solution graphically on number line: 2(x 1) < x + 5, 3(x + 2) > 2 x Answer 2(x 1) < x + 5 2x 2 < x + 5 2x x < 5 + 2 x < 7 (1) 3(x + 2) > 2 x 3x + 6 > 2 x 3x + x > 2 6 4x > 4 x > 1 (2) From (1) and (2), it can be concluded that the solution set for the given system of inequalities is (1, 7). The solution of the given system of inequalities can be represented on number line as
Question 9: Solve the following inequalities and represent the solution graphically on number line: 3x 7 > 2(x 6), 6 x > 11 2x Answer:
Class XI 3x 7 > 2(x 6) 3x 7 > 2x 12 3x 2x > 12 + 7
Maths
x > 5 (1) 6 x > 11 2x x + 2x > 11 6 x > 5 (2) From (1) and (2), it can be concluded that the solution set for the given system of inequalities is on number line as . The solution of the given system of inequalities can be represented
Question 10: Solve the inequalities and represent the solution graphically on number line: 5(2x 7) 3(2x + 3) 0, 2x + 19 6x + 47 Answer 5(2x 7) 3(2x + 3) 0 10x 35 6x 9 0 4x 44 0 4x 44 x 11 (1) 2x + 19 6x + 47 19 47 6x 2x 28 4x 7 x (2) From (1) and (2), it can be concluded that the solution set for the given system of inequalities is [7, 11]. The solution of the given system of inequalities can be represented on number line as
Class XI
Maths
Question 11: A solution is to be kept between 68F and 77F. What is the range in temperature in degree Celsius (C) if the Celsius/Fahrenheit (F) conversion formula is given by
Answer Since the solution is to be kept between 68F and 77F, 68 < F < 77
Putting
we obtain
Thus, the required range of temperature in degree Celsius is between 20C and 25C.
Question 12: A solution of 8% boric acid is to be diluted by adding a 2% boric acid solution to it. The resulting mixture is to be more than 4% but less than 6% boric acid. If we have 640 litres of the 8% solution, how many litres of the 2% solution will have to be added? Answer Let x litres of 2% boric acid solution is required to be added. Then, total mixture = (x + 640) litres This resulting mixture is to be more than 4% but less than 6% boric acid. 2%x + 8% of 640 > 4% of (x + 640) And, 2% x + 8% of 640 < 6% of (x + 640) 2%x + 8% of 640 > 4% of (x + 640)
Class XI
Maths
2x + 5120 > 4x + 2560 5120 2560 > 4x 2x 5120 2560 > 2x 2560 > 2x 1280 > x 2% x + 8% of 640 < 6% of (x + 640)
2x + 5120 < 6x + 3840 5120 3840 < 6x 2x 1280 < 4x 320 < x 320 < x < 1280 Thus, the number of litres of 2% of boric acid solution that is to be added will have to be more than 320 litres but less than 1280 litres.
Question 13: How many litres of water will have to be added to 1125 litres of the 45% solution of acid so that the resulting mixture will contain more than 25% but less than 30% acid content? Answer Let x litres of water is required to be added. Then, total mixture = (x + 1125) litres It is evident that the amount of acid contained in the resulting mixture is 45% of 1125 litres. This resulting mixture will contain more than 25% but less than 30% acid content. 30% of (1125 + x) > 45% of 1125 And, 25% of (1125 + x) < 45% of 1125 30% of (1125 + x) > 45% of 1125
Class XI
Maths
25% of (1125 + x) < 45% of 1125
562.5 < x < 900 Thus, the required number of litres of water that is to be added will have to be more than 562.5 but less than 900.
Question 14: IQ of a person is given by the formula
Where MA is mental age and CA is chronological age. If 80 IQ 140 for a group of 12 years old children, find the range of their mental age. Answer It is given that for a group of 12 years old children, 80 IQ 140 (i) For a group of 12 years old children, CA = 12 years
Putting this value of IQ in (i), we obtain

Class XI
Maths
Thus, the range of mental age of the group of 12 years old children is
Class XI
Chapter 7 Permutations and Combinations
Maths
Exercise 7.1
Question 1: How many 3-digit numbers can be formed from the digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 assuming that (i) repetition of the digits is allowed? (ii) repetition of the digits is not allowed? Answer (i) There will be as many ways as there are ways of filling 3 vacant places in succession by the given five digits. In this case, repetition of digits is allowed. Therefore, the units place can be filled in by any of the given five digits. Similarly, tens and hundreds digits can be filled in by any of the given five digits. Thus, by the multiplication principle, the number of ways in which three-digit numbers can be formed from the given digits is 5 5 5 = 125 (ii) In this case, repetition of digits is not allowed. Here, if units place is filled in first, then it can be filled by any of the given five digits. Therefore, the number of ways of filling the units place of the three-digit number is 5. Then, the tens place can be filled with any of the remaining four digits and the hundreds place can be filled with any of the remaining three digits. Thus, by the multiplication principle, the number of ways in which three-digit numbers can be formed without repeating the given digits is 5 4 3 = 60
Question 2: How many 3-digit even numbers can be formed from the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 if the digits can be repeated? Answer There will be as many ways as there are ways of filling 3 vacant places in succession by the given six digits. In this case, the units place can be filled by 2 or 4 or 6 only i.e., the units place can be filled in 3 ways. The tens place can be filled by any of the 6 digits in 6 different ways and also the hundreds place can be filled by any of the 6 digits in 6 different ways, as the digits can be repeated.
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, by multiplication principle, the required number of three digit even numbers is 3 6 6 = 108
Question 3: How many 4-letter code can be formed using the first 10 letters of the English alphabet, if no letter can be repeated? Answer There are as many codes as there are ways of filling 4 vacant places succession by the first 10 letters of the English alphabet, keeping in mind that the repetition of letters is not allowed. The first place can be filled in 10 different ways by any of the first 10 letters of the English alphabet following which, the second place can be filled in by any of the remaining letters in 9 different ways. The third place can be filled in by any of the remaining 8 letters in 8 different ways and the fourth place can be filled in by any of the remaining 7 letters in 7 different ways. Therefore, by multiplication principle, the required numbers of ways in which 4 vacant places can be filled is 10 9 8 7 = 5040 Hence, 5040 four-letter codes can be formed using the first 10 letters of the English alphabet, if no letter is repeated. in
Question 4: How many 5digit telephone numbers can be constructed using the digits 0 to 9 if each number starts with 67 and no digit appears more than once? Answer It is given that the 5-digit telephone numbers always start with 67. Therefore, there will be as many phone numbers as there are ways of filling 3 vacant places repeated. The units place can be filled by any of the digits from 0 9, except digits 6 and 7. Therefore, the units place can be filled in 8 different ways following which, the tens place can be filled in by any of the remaining 7 digits in 7 different ways, and the hundreds place can be filled in by any of the remaining 6 digits in 6 different ways. by the digits 0 9, keeping in mind that the digits cannot be
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, by multiplication principle, the required number of ways in which 5-digit telephone numbers can be constructed is 8 7 6 = 336
Question 5: A coin is tossed 3 times and the outcomes are recorded. How many possible outcomes are there? Answer When a coin is tossed once, the number of outcomes is 2 (Head and tail) i.e., in each throw, the number of ways of showing a different face is 2. Thus, by multiplication principle, the required number of possible outcomes is 2 2 2 =8
Question 6: Given 5 flags of different colours, how many different signals can be generated if each signal requires the use of 2 flags, one below the other? Answer Each signal requires the use of 2 flags. There will be as many flags as there are ways of filling in 2 vacant places succession by the given 5 flags of different colours. The upper vacant place can be filled in 5 different ways by any one of the 5 flags following which, the lower vacant place can be filled in 4 different ways by any one of the remaining 4 different flags. Thus, by multiplication principle, the number of different signals that can be generated is 5 4 = 20 in
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 7.2
Question 1: Evaluate (i) 8! (ii) 4! 3! Answer (i) 8! = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = 40320 (ii) 4! = 1 2 3 4 = 24 3! = 1 2 3 = 6 4! 3! = 24 6 = 18
Question 2: Is 3! + 4! = 7!? Answer 3! = 1 2 3 = 6 4! = 1 2 3 4 = 24 3! + 4! = 6 + 24 = 30 7! = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = 5040 3! + 4! 7!
Question 3:
Compute Answer
Question 4:
If Answer
, find x.
Class XI
Maths
Question 5:
Evaluate
, when
(i) n = 6, r = 2 (ii) n = 9, r = 5 Answer
(i) When n = 6, r = 2,
(ii) When n = 9, r = 5,
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 7.3
Question 1: How many 3-digit numbers can be formed by using the digits 1 to 9 if no digit is repeated? Answer 3-digit numbers have to be formed using the digits 1 to 9. Here, the order of the digits matters. Therefore, there will be as many 3-digit numbers as there are permutations of 9 different digits taken 3 at a time.
Therefore, required number of 3-digit numbers
Question 2: How many 4-digit numbers are there with no digit repeated? Answer The thousands place of the 4-digit number is to be filled with any of the digits from 1 to 9 as the digit 0 cannot be included. Therefore, the number of ways in which thousands place can be filled is 9. The hundreds, tens, and units place can be filled by any of the digits from 0 to 9. However, the digits cannot be repeated in the 4-digit numbers and thousands place is already occupied with a digit. The hundreds, tens, and units place is to be filled by the remaining 9 digits. Therefore, there will be as many such 3-digit numbers as there are permutations of 9 different digits taken 3 at a time.
Number of such 3-digit numbers
Thus, by multiplication principle, the required number of 4-digit numbers is 9 504 = 4536
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: How many 3-digit even numbers can be made using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, if no digit is repeated? Answer 3-digit even numbers are to be formed using the given six digits, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7, without repeating the digits. Then, units digits can be filled in 3 ways by any of the digits, 2, 4, or 6. Since the digits cannot be repeated in the 3-digit numbers and units place is already occupied with a digit (which is even), the hundreds and tens place is to be filled by the remaining 5 digits. Therefore, the number of ways in which hundreds and tens place can be filled with the remaining 5 digits is the permutation of 5 different digits taken 2 at a time.
Number of ways of filling hundreds and tens place
Thus, by multiplication principle, the required number of 3-digit numbers is 3 20 = 60
Question 4: Find the number of 4-digit numbers that can be formed using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 if no digit is repeated. How many of these will be even? Answer 4-digit numbers are to be formed using the digits, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. There will be as many 4-digit numbers as there are permutations of 5 different digits taken 4 at a time.
Therefore, required number of 4 digit numbers =
Among the 4-digit numbers formed by using the digits, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, even numbers end with either 2 or 4.
Class XI
Maths
The number of ways in which units place is filled with digits is 2. Since the digits are not repeated and the units place is already occupied with a digit (which is even), the remaining places are to be filled by the remaining 4 digits. Therefore, the number of ways in which the remaining places can be filled is the permutation of 4 different digits taken 3 at a time.
Number of ways of filling the remaining places = 4 3 2 1 = 24 Thus, by multiplication principle, the required number of even numbers is 24 2 = 48
Question 5: From a committee of 8 persons, in how many ways can we choose a chairman and a vice chairman assuming one person cannot hold more than one position? Answer From a committee of 8 persons, a chairman and a vice chairman are to be chosen in such a way that one person cannot hold more than one position. Here, the number of ways of choosing a chairman and a vice chairman is the permutation of 8 different objects taken 2 at a time.
Thus, required number of ways =
Question 6: Find n if Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Find r if (i) Answer (i) (ii) .
Class XI
Maths
It is known that, 0 r 5 Hence, r 10 r = 3 (ii)
Class XI
Maths
It is known that, 0 r 5 Hence, r 9 r = 4
Question 8: How many words, with or without meaning, can be formed using all the letters of the word EQUATION, using each letter exactly once? Answer There are 8 different letters in the word EQUATION. Therefore, the number of words that can be formed using all the letters of the word EQUATION, using each letter exactly once, is the number of permutations of 8 different objects taken 8 at a time, which is .
Thus, required number of words that can be formed = 8! = 40320
Question 9: How many words, with or without meaning can be made from the letters of the word MONDAY, assuming that no letter is repeated, if (i) 4 letters are used at a time, (ii) all letters are used at a time, (iii) all letters are used but first letter is a vowel? Answer There are 6 different letters in the word MONDAY. (i) Number of 4-letter words that can be formed from the letters of the word MONDAY, without repetition of letters, is the number of permutations of 6 different objects taken 4 at a time, which is .
Thus, required number of words that can be formed using 4 letters at a time is
Class XI
Maths
(ii) Number of words that can be formed by using all the letters of the word MONDAY at a time is the number of permutations of 6 different objects taken 6 at a time, which is . Thus, required number of words that can be formed when all letters are used at a time = 6! = 6 5 4 3 2 1 = 720 (iii) In the given word, there are 2 different vowels, which have to occupy the rightmost place of the words formed. This can be done only in 2 ways. Since the letters cannot be repeated and the rightmost place is already occupied with a letter (which is a vowel), the remaining five places are to be filled by the remaining 5 letters. This can be done in 5! ways. Thus, in this case, required number of words that can be formed is 5! 2 = 120 2 = 240
Question 10: In how many of the distinct permutations of the letters in MISSISSIPPI do the four Is not come together? Answer In the given word MISSISSIPPI, I appears 4 times, S appears 4 times, P appears 2 times, and M appears just once. Therefore, number of distinct permutations of the letters in the given word
There are 4 Is in the given word. When they occur together, they are treated as a single object for the time being. This single object together with the remaining 7 objects
will account for 8 objects.
Class XI
Maths
These 8 objects in which there are 4 Ss and 2 Ps can be arranged in ways. Number of arrangements where all Is occur together = 840
ways i.e., 840
Thus, number of distinct permutations of the letters in MISSISSIPPI in which four Is do not come together = 34650 840 = 33810
Question 11: In how many ways can the letters of the word PERMUTATIONS be arranged if the (i) words start with P and end with S, (ii) vowels are all together, (ii) there are always 4 letters between P and S? Answer In the word PERMUTATIONS, there are 2 Ts and all the other letters appear only once. (i) If P and S are fixed at the extreme ends (P at the left end and S at the right end), then 10 letters are left.
Hence, in this case, required number of arrangements (ii) There are 5 vowels in the given word, each appearing only once. Since they have to always occur together, they are treated as a single object for the time being. This single object together with the remaining 7 objects will account for 8
objects. These 8 objects in which there are 2 Ts can be arranged in
Corresponding to each of these arrangements, the 5 different vowels can be arranged in 5! ways. Therefore, by multiplication principle, required number of arrangements in this case
(iii) The letters have to be arranged in such a way that there are always 4 letters between P and S. Therefore, in a way, the places of P and S are fixed. The remaining 10 letters in which
there are 2 Ts can be arranged in
Class XI
Maths
Also, the letters P and S can be placed such that there are 4 letters between them in 2 7 = 14 ways. Therefore, by multiplication principle, required number of arrangements in this case
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 7.4
Question 1: If Answer It is known that, Therefore, , find .
Question 2: Determine n if (i) Answer (i) (ii)
Class XI
Maths
(ii)
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: How many chords can be drawn through 21 points on a circle? Answer For drawing one chord on a circle, only 2 points are required. To know the number of chords that can be drawn through the given 21 points on a circle, the number of combinations have to be counted. Therefore, there will be as many chords as there are combinations of 21 points taken 2 at a time.
Thus, required number of chords =
Question 4: In how many ways can a team of 3 boys and 3 girls be selected from 5 boys and 4 girls? Answer A team of 3 boys and 3 girls is to be selected from 5 boys and 4 girls. 3 boys can be selected from 5 boys in 3 girls can be selected from 4 girls in ways. ways.
Therefore, by multiplication principle, number of ways in which a team of 3 boys and 3
girls can be selected
Question 5: Find the number of ways of selecting 9 balls from 6 red balls, 5 white balls and 5 blue balls if each selection consists of 3 balls of each colour. Answer There are a total of 6 red balls, 5 white balls, and 5 blue balls.
Class XI
Maths
9 balls have to be selected in such a way that each selection consists of 3 balls of each colour. Here, 3 balls can be selected from 6 red balls in 3 balls can be selected from 5 white balls in 3 balls can be selected from 5 blue balls in ways. ways. ways.
Thus, by multiplication principle, required number of ways of selecting 9 balls
Question 6: Determine the number of 5 card combinations out of a deck of 52 cards if there is exactly one ace in each combination. Answer In a deck of 52 cards, there are 4 aces. A combination of 5 cards have to be made in which there is exactly one ace. Then, one ace can be selected in out of the 48 cards in ways. ways and the remaining 4 cards can be selected
Thus, by multiplication principle, required number of 5 card combinations
Question 7: In how many ways can one select a cricket team of eleven from 17 players in which only 5 players can bowl if each cricket team of 11 must include exactly 4 bowlers?
Class XI Answer
Maths
Out of 17 players, 5 players are bowlers. A cricket team of 11 players is to be selected in such a way that there are exactly 4 bowlers. 4 bowlers can be selected in of the 12 players in ways. ways and the remaining 7 players can be selected out
Thus, by multiplication principle, required number of ways of selecting cricket team
Question 8: A bag contains 5 black and 6 red balls. Determine the number of ways in which 2 black and 3 red balls can be selected. Answer There are 5 black and 6 red balls in the bag. 2 black balls can be selected out of 5 black balls in selected out of 6 red balls in ways. ways and 3 red balls can be
Thus, by multiplication principle, required number of ways of selecting 2 black and 3 red
balls
Question 9: In how many ways can a student choose a programme of 5 courses if 9 courses are available and 2 specific courses are compulsory for every student? Answer There are 9 courses available out of which, 2 specific courses are compulsory for every student. Therefore, every student has to choose 3 courses out of the remaining 7 courses. This can be chosen in ways.
Thus, required number of ways of choosing the programme
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: How many words, with or without meaning, each of 2 vowels and 3 consonants can be formed from the letters of the word DAUGHTER? Answer In the word DAUGHTER, there are 3 vowels namely, A, U, and E, and 5 consonants namely, D, G, H, T, and R. Number of ways of selecting 2 vowels out of 3 vowels = Number of ways of selecting 3 consonants out of 5 consonants = Therefore, number of combinations of 2 vowels and 3 consonants = 3 10 = 30 Each of these 30 combinations of 2 vowels and 3 consonants can be arranged among themselves in 5! ways. Hence, required number of different words = 30 5! = 3600
Question 2: How many words, with or without meaning, can be formed using all the letters of the word EQUATION at a time so that the vowels and consonants occur together? Answer In the word EQUATION, there are 5 vowels, namely, A, E, I, O, and U, and 3 consonants, namely, Q, T, and N. Since all the vowels and consonants have to occur together, both (AEIOU) and (QTN) can be assumed as single objects. Then, the permutations of these 2 objects taken all at a time are counted. This number would be Corresponding to each of these permutations, there are 5! permutations of the five vowels taken all at a time and 3! permutations of the 3 consonants taken all at a time. Hence, by multiplication principle, required number of words = 2! 5! 3! = 1440
Question 3:
Class XI
Maths
A committee of 7 has to be formed from 9 boys and 4 girls. In how many ways can this be done when the committee consists of: (i) exactly 3 girls? (ii) atleast 3 girls? (iii) atmost 3 girls? Answer A committee of 7 has to be formed from 9 boys and 4 girls. i. Since exactly 3 girls are to be there in every committee, each committee must consist of (7 3) = 4 boys only.
Thus, in this case, required number of ways =
(ii) Since at least 3 girls are to be there in every committee, the committee can consist of (a) 3 girls and 4 boys or (b) 4 girls and 3 boys 3 girls and 4 boys can be selected in 4 girls and 3 boys can be selected in ways. ways.
Therefore, in this case, required number of ways =
(iii) Since atmost 3 girls are to be there in every committee, the committee can consist of (a) 3 girls and 4 boys (b) 2 girls and 5 boys (c) 1 girl and 6 boys (d) No girl and 7 boys 3 girls and 4 boys can be selected in 2 girls and 5 boys can be selected in 1 girl and 6 boys can be selected in No girl and 7 boys can be selected in ways. ways. ways. ways.
Therefore, in this case, required number of ways
Class XI
Maths
Question 4: If the different permutations of all the letter of the word EXAMINATION are listed as in a dictionary, how many words are there in this list before the first word starting with E? Answer In the given word EXAMINATION, there are 11 letters out of which, A, I, and N appear 2 times and all the other letters appear only once. The words that will be listed before the words starting with E in a dictionary will be the words that start with A only. Therefore, to get the number of words starting with A, the letter A is fixed at the extreme left position, and then the remaining 10 letters taken all at a time are rearranged. Since there are 2 Is and 2 Ns in the remaining 10 letters,
Number of words starting with A = Thus, the required numbers of words is 907200.
Question 5: How many 6-digit numbers can be formed from the digits 0, 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 which are divisible by 10 and no digit is repeated? Answer A number is divisible by 10 if its units digits is 0. Therefore, 0 is fixed at the units place. Therefore, there will be as many ways as there are ways of filling 5 vacant places in succession by the remaining 5 digits (i.e., 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9). The 5 vacant places can be filled in 5! ways. Hence, required number of 6-digit numbers = 5! = 120
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: The English alphabet has 5 vowels and 21 consonants. How many words with two different vowels and 2 different consonants can be formed from the alphabet? Answer 2 different vowels and 2 different consonants are to be selected from the English alphabet. Since there are 5 vowels in the English alphabet, number of ways of selecting 2 different
vowels from the alphabet = Since there are 21 consonants in the English alphabet, number of ways of selecting 2
different consonants from the alphabet Therefore, number of combinations of 2 different vowels and 2 different consonants = 10 210 = 2100 Each of these 2100 combinations has 4 letters, which can be arranged among themselves in 4! ways. Therefore, required number of words = 2100 4! = 50400
Question 7: In an examination, a question paper consists of 12 questions divided into two parts i.e., Part I and Part II, containing 5 and 7 questions, respectively. A student is required to attempt 8 questions in all, selecting at least 3 from each part. In how many ways can a student select the questions? Answer It is given that the question paper consists of 12 questions divided into two parts Part I and Part II, containing 5 and 7 questions, respectively. A student has to attempt 8 questions, selecting at least 3 from each part. This can be done as follows. (a) 3 questions from part I and 5 questions from part II (b) 4 questions from part I and 4 questions from part II (c) 5 questions from part I and 3 questions from part II
Class XI
Maths ways. ways. ways.
3 questions from part I and 5 questions from part II can be selected in 4 questions from part I and 4 questions from part II can be selected in 5 questions from part I and 3 questions from part II can be selected in Thus, required number of ways of selecting questions
Question 8: Determine the number of 5-card combinations out of a deck of 52 cards if each selection of 5 cards has exactly one king. Answer From a deck of 52 cards, 5-card combinations have to be made in such a way that in each selection of 5 cards, there is exactly one king. In a deck of 52 cards, there are 4 kings. 1 king can be selected out of 4 kings in ways. ways. .
4 cards out of the remaining 48 cards can be selected in Thus, the required number of 5-card combinations is
Question 9: It is required to seat 5 men and 4 women in a row so that the women occupy the even places. How many such arrangements are possible? Answer 5 men and 4 women are to be seated in a row such that the women occupy the even places. The 5 men can be seated in 5! ways. For each arrangement, the 4 women can be seated only at the cross marked places (so that women occupy the even places).
Therefore, the women can be seated in 4! ways.

Class XI
Maths
Thus, possible number of arrangements = 4! 5! = 24 120 = 2880
Question 10: From a class of 25 students, 10 are to be chosen for an excursion party. There are 3 students who decide that either all of them will join or none of them will join. In how many ways can the excursion party be chosen? Answer From the class of 25 students, 10 are to be chosen for an excursion party. Since there are 3 students who decide that either all of them will join or none of them will join, there are two cases. Case I: All the three students join. Then, the remaining 7 students can be chosen from the remaining 22 students in ways. Case II: None of the three students join. Then, 10 students can be chosen from the remaining 22 students in Thus, required number of ways of choosing the excursion party is ways. .
Question 11: In how many ways can the letters of the word ASSASSINATION be arranged so that all the Ss are together? Answer In the given word ASSASSINATION, the letter A appears 3 times, S appears 4 times, I appears 2 times, N appears 2 times, and all the other letters appear only once. Since all the words have to be arranged in such a way that all the Ss are together, SSSS is treated as a single object for the time being. This single object together with the remaining 9 objects will account for 10 objects.
These 10 objects in which there are 3 As, 2 Is, and 2 Ns can be arranged in ways. Thus, required number of ways of arranging the letters of the given word
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Chapter 8 Binomial Theorem
Maths
Exercise 8.1
Question 1: Expand the expression (1 2x)5 Answer By using Binomial Theorem, the expression (1 2x)5 can be expanded as
Question 2:
Expand the expression Answer
By using Binomial Theorem, the expression
can be expanded as
Question 3: Expand the expression (2x 3)6 Answer By using Binomial Theorem, the expression (2x 3)6 can be expanded as
Page 1 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 4:
Expand the expression Answer
can be expanded as
Question 5:
Expand Answer
can be expanded as
Page 2 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Using Binomial Theorem, evaluate (96)3 Answer 96 can be expressed as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are easier to calculate and then, binomial theorem can be applied. It can be written that, 96 = 100 4
Question 7: Using Binomial Theorem, evaluate (102)5 Answer 102 can be expressed as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are easier to calculate and then, Binomial Theorem can be applied. It can be written that, 102 = 100 + 2
Page 3 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Using Binomial Theorem, evaluate (101)4 Answer 101 can be expressed as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are easier to calculate and then, Binomial Theorem can be applied. It can be written that, 101 = 100 + 1
Question 9: Using Binomial Theorem, evaluate (99)5 Answer 99 can be written as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are easier to calculate and then, Binomial Theorem can be applied. It can be written that, 99 = 100 1
Page 4 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 10: Using Binomial Theorem, indicate which number is larger (1.1)10000 or 1000. Answer By splitting 1.1 and then applying Binomial Theorem, the first few terms of (1.1)10000 can be obtained as
Question 11: Find (a + b)4 (a b)4. Hence, evaluate Answer Using Binomial Theorem, the expressions, (a + b)4 and (a b)4, can be expanded as
Page 5 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 12: Find (x + 1)6 + (x 1)6. Hence or otherwise evaluate Answer Using Binomial Theorem, the expressions, (x + 1)6 and (x 1)6, can be expanded as
By putting
, we obtain
Page 6 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 13: Show that Answer In order to show that is divisible by 64, it has to be proved that, is divisible by 64, whenever n is a positive integer.
, where k is some natural number By Binomial Theorem,
For a = 8 and m = n + 1, we obtain
Thus,
is divisible by 64, whenever n is a positive integer.
Question 14:
Prove that Answer By Binomial Theorem,
By putting b = 3 and a = 1 in the above equation, we obtain
Hence, proved.
Page 7 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 8.2
Question 1: Find the coefficient of x5 in (x + 3)8 Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Assuming that x5 occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion (x + 3)8, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in x5 and in Tr +1, we obtain r=3
Thus, the coefficient of x5 is
Question 2: Find the coefficient of a5b7 in (a 2b)12 Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Assuming that a5b7 occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion (a 2b)12, we obtain
Comparing the indices of a and b in a5 b7 and in Tr +1, we obtain r=7 Thus, the coefficient of a5b7 is
Question 3: Write the general term in the expansion of (x2 y)6 Answer
Page 8 of 25
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the general term Tr+1 {which is the (r + 1)th term} in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by
2
Thus, the general term in the expansion of (x y6) is
Question 4: Write the general term in the expansion of (x2 yx)12, x 0 Answer It is known that the general term Tr+1 {which is the (r + 1)th term} in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by
2
Thus, the general term in the expansion of(x yx)12 is
Question 5: Find the 4th term in the expansion of (x 2y)12 . Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Thus, the 4th term in the expansion of (x 2y)12 is
Question 6:
Find the 13th term in the expansion of Answer
It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by .
Page 9 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Thus, 13th term in the expansion of
is
Question 7:
Find the middle terms in the expansions of Answer It is known that in the expansion of (a + b)n, if n is odd, then there are two middle
terms, namely,
term and
term.
Therefore, the middle terms in the expansion of
are
term and
term
Page 10 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the middle terms in the expansion of
are
Question 8:
Find the middle terms in the expansions of Answer
It is known that in the expansion (a + b)n, if n is even, then the middle term is term.
Therefore, the middle term in the expansion of
is
term
Thus, the middle term in the expansion of
is 61236 x5y5.
Question 9: In the expansion of (1 + a)m + n, prove that coefficients of am and an are equal. Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Assuming that am occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion (1 + a)m + n, we obtain
Comparing the indices of a in am and in Tr + 1, we obtain r=m
Page 11 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the coefficient of am is
Assuming that an occurs in the (k + 1)th term of the expansion (1 + a)m+n, we obtain
Comparing the indices of a in an and in Tk + 1, we obtain k=n Therefore, the coefficient of an is
Thus, from (1) and (2), it can be observed that the coefficients of am and an in the expansion of (1 + a)m + n are equal.
Question 10: The coefficients of the (r 1)th, rth and (r + 1)th terms in the expansion of (x + 1)n are in the ratio 1:3:5. Find n and r. Answer It is known that (k + 1)th term, (Tk+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Therefore, (r 1)th term in the expansion of (x + 1)n is
r th term in the expansion of (x + 1)n is (r + 1)th term in the expansion of (x + 1)n is Therefore, the coefficients of the (r 1)th, rth, and (r + 1)th terms in the expansion of (x + 1)n are 1:3:5, we obtain respectively. Since these coefficients are in the ratio
Page 12 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Multiplying (1) by 3 and subtracting it from (2), we obtain 4r 12 = 0 r=3 Putting the value of r in (1), we obtain n 12 + 5 = 0 n=7 Thus, n = 7 and r = 3
Question 11: Prove that the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is twice the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n1 . Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Page 13 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Assuming that xn occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion of (1 + x)2n, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in xn and in Tr + 1, we obtain r=n Therefore, the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is
Assuming that xn occurs in the (k +1)th term of the expansion (1 + x)2n 1, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in xn and Tk + 1, we obtain k=n Therefore, the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n 1 is
From (1) and (2), it is observed that
Therefore, the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is twice the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n1. Hence, proved.
Question 12: Find a positive value of m for which the coefficient of x2 in the expansion (1 + x)m is 6. Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Page 14 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Assuming that x2 occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion (1 +x)m, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in x2 and in Tr + 1, we obtain r=2 Therefore, the coefficient of x2 is

2
It is given that the coefficient of x in the expansion (1 + x)m is 6.
Thus, the positive value of m, for which the coefficient of x2 in the expansion (1 + x)m is 6, is 4.
Page 15 of 25
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: Find a, b and n in the expansion of (a + b)n if the first three terms of the expansion are 729, 7290 and 30375, respectively. Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . The first three terms of the expansion are given as 729, 7290, and 30375 respectively. Therefore, we obtain
Dividing (2) by (1), we obtain
Page 16 of 25
Class XI
Maths
From (4) and (5), we obtain
Substituting n = 6 in equation (1), we obtain a6 = 729
From (5), we obtain
Thus, a = 3, b = 5, and n = 6.
Question 2: Find a if the coefficients of x2 and x3 in the expansion of (3 + ax)9 are equal. Answer It is known that (r + 1)th term, (Tr+1), in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is given by . Assuming that x2 occurs in the (r + 1)th term in the expansion of (3 + ax)9, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in x2 and in Tr + 1, we obtain
Page 17 of 25
Class XI r=2 Thus, the coefficient of x2 is
Maths
Assuming that x3 occurs in the (k + 1)th term in the expansion of (3 + ax)9, we obtain
Comparing the indices of x in x3 and in Tk+ 1, we obtain k=3 Thus, the coefficient of x3 is
It is given that the coefficients of x2 and x3 are the same.
Thus, the required value of a is
Question 3: Find the coefficient of x5 in the product (1 + 2x)6 (1 x)7 using binomial theorem. Answer Using Binomial Theorem, the expressions, (1 + 2x)6 and (1 x)7, can be expanded as
Page 18 of 25
Class XI
Maths
The complete multiplication of the two brackets is not required to be carried out. Only those terms, which involve x5, are required. The terms containing x5 are
Thus, the coefficient of x5 in the given product is 171.
Question 4: If a and b are distinct integers, prove that a b is a factor of an bn, whenever n is a positive integer. [Hint: write an = (a b + b)n and expand] Answer In order to prove that (a b) is a factor of (an bn), it has to be proved that an bn = k (a b), where k is some natural number It can be written that, a = a b + b
This shows that (a b) is a factor of (an bn), where n is a positive integer.
Page 19 of 25
Maths
Evaluate Answer
Firstly, the expression (a + b)6 (a b)6 is simplified by using Binomial Theorem. This can be done as
Question 6:
Find the value of Answer
Firstly, the expression (x + y)4 + (x y)4 is simplified by using Binomial Theorem. This can be done as
Page 20 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Find an approximation of (0.99)5 using the first three terms of its expansion. Answer 0.99 = 1 0.01
Thus, the value of (0.99)5 is approximately 0.951.
Question 8:
Page 21 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Find n, if the ratio of the fifth term from the beginning to the fifth term from the end in
the expansion of Answer In the expansion, Fifth term from the beginning Fifth term from the end ,
Therefore, it is evident that in the expansion of
, the fifth term from the
beginning is
and the fifth term from the end is
It is given that the ratio of the fifth term from the beginning to the fifth term from the end is . Therefore, from (1) and (2), we obtain
Page 22 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the value of n is 10.
Question 9:
Expand using Binomial Theorem Answer
Using Binomial Theorem, the given expression
can be expanded as
Page 23 of 25
Class XI
Maths
Again by using Binomial Theorem, we obtain
From (1), (2), and (3), we obtain

Class XI
Maths
Find the expansion of Answer
using binomial theorem.
Using Binomial Theorem, the given expression
can be expanded as
Again by using Binomial Theorem, we obtain
Page 25 of 25
Class XI
Chapter 9 Sequences and Series
Maths
Exercise 9.1
Question 1: Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is Answer
Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, we obtain
Therefore, the required terms are 3, 8, 15, 24, and 35.
Question 2:
Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is Answer
Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we obtain
Therefore, the required terms are
Question 3: Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is an = 2n Answer an = 2 n Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Question 4:
Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we obtain
Question 5: Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Question 6:
Write the first five terms of the sequences whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we obtain
Question 7: Find the 17th term in the following sequence whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 17, we obtain
Substituting n = 24, we obtain

Class XI
Maths
Question 8:
Find the 7th term in the following sequence whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 7, we obtain
Question 9: Find the 9th term in the following sequence whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 9, we obtain
Question 10:
Find the 20th term in the following sequence whose nth term is Answer Substituting n = 20, we obtain
Question 11: Write the first five terms of the following sequence and obtain the corresponding series:
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Hence, the first five terms of the sequence are 3, 11, 35, 107, and 323. The corresponding series is 3 + 11 + 35 + 107 + 323 +
Answer
Hence, the first five terms of the sequence are
The corresponding series is
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Hence, the first five terms of the sequence are 2, 2, 1, 0, and 1. The corresponding series is 2 + 2 + 1 + 0 + (1) +
Question 14: The Fibonacci sequence is defined by
Find Answer
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 9.2
Question 1: Find the sum of odd integers from 1 to 2001. Answer The odd integers from 1 to 2001 are 1, 3, 5, 1999, 2001. This sequence forms an A.P. Here, first term, a = 1 Common difference, d = 2
Thus, the sum of odd numbers from 1 to 2001 is 1002001.
Question 2: Find the sum of all natural numbers lying between 100 and 1000, which are multiples of 5. Answer The natural numbers lying between 100 and 1000, which are multiples of 5, are 105, 110, 995.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the sum of all natural numbers lying between 100 and 1000, which are multiples of 5, is 98450.
Question 3: In an A.P, the first term is 2 and the sum of the first five terms is one-fourth of the next five terms. Show that 20th term is 112. Answer First term = 2 Let d be the common difference of the A.P. Therefore, the A.P. is 2, 2 + d, 2 + 2d, 2 + 3d, Sum of first five terms = 10 + 10d Sum of next five terms = 10 + 35d According to the given condition,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the 20th term of the A.P. is 112.
Question 4:
How many terms of the A.P. Answer
are needed to give the sum 25?
Let the sum of n terms of the given A.P. be 25.
It is known that, d = common difference Here, a = 6
, where n = number of terms, a = first term, and
Therefore, we obtain
Question 5:
In an A.P., if pth term is
and qth term is
, prove that the sum of first pq terms is
Class XI Answer
Maths
It is known that the general term of an A.P. is an = a + (n 1)d According to the given information,
Subtracting (2) from (1), we obtain
Putting the value of d in (1), we obtain
Thus, the sum of first pq terms of the A.P. is
Maths
If the sum of a certain number of terms of the A.P. 25, 22, 19, is 116. Find the last term Answer Let the sum of n terms of the given A.P. be 116.
Here, a = 25 and d = 22 25 = 3
However, n cannot be equal to
. Therefore, n = 8
a8 = Last term = a + (n 1)d = 25 + (8 1) ( 3) = 25 + (7) ( 3) = 25 21 =4 Thus, the last term of the A.P. is 4.
Question 7: Find the sum to n terms of the A.P., whose kth term is 5k + 1. Answer It is given that the kth term of the A.P. is 5k + 1. kth term = ak = a + (k 1)d a + (k 1)d = 5k + 1 a + kd d = 5k + 1
Class XI
Maths
Comparing the coefficient of k, we obtain d = 5 ad=1 a5=1 a=6
Question 8: If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is (pn + qn2), where p and q are constants, find the common difference. Answer
It is known that, According to the given condition,
Comparing the coefficients of n2 on both sides, we obtain
d=2q Thus, the common difference of the A.P. is 2q.
Maths
The sums of n terms of two arithmetic progressions are in the ratio 5n + 4: 9n + 6. Find the ratio of their 18th terms. Answer Let a1, a2, and d1, d2 be the first terms and the common difference of the first and second arithmetic progression respectively. According to the given condition,
Substituting n = 35 in (1), we obtain
Thus, the ratio of 18th term of both the A.P.s is 179: 321.
Question 10: If the sum of first p terms of an A.P. is equal to the sum of the first q terms, then find the sum of the first (p + q) terms. Answer Let a and d be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. Here,
Class XI
Maths
According to the given condition,
Thus, the sum of the first (p + q) terms of the A.P. is 0.
Question 11: Sum of the first p, q and r terms of an A.P. are a, b and c, respectively.
Prove that Answer Let a1 and d be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. According to the given information,
Class XI
Maths
Equating both the values of d obtained in (4) and (5), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Dividing both sides by pqr, we obtain
Thus, the given result is proved.
Question 12: The ratio of the sums of m and n terms of an A.P. is m2: n2. Show that the ratio of mth and nth term is (2m 1): (2n 1). Answer Let a and b be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. According to the given condition,
Putting m = 2m 1 and n = 2n 1 in (1), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Question 13: If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is Answer Let a and b be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. am = a + (m 1)d = 164 (1) and its mth term is 164, find the value of m.
Sum of n terms, Here,
Comparing the coefficient of n2 on both sides, we obtain
Comparing the coefficient of n on both sides, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, from (1), we obtain 8 + (m 1) 6 = 164 (m 1) 6 = 164 8 = 156 m 1 = 26 m = 27 Thus, the value of m is 27.
Question 14: Insert five numbers between 8 and 26 such that the resulting sequence is an A.P. Answer Let A1, A2, A3, A4, and A5 be five numbers between 8 and 26 such that 8, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, 26 is an A.P. Here, a = 8, b = 26, n = 7 Therefore, 26 = 8 + (7 1) d 6d = 26 8 = 18 d=3 A1 = a + d = 8 + 3 = 11 A2 = a + 2d = 8 + 2 3 = 8 + 6 = 14 A3 = a + 3d = 8 + 3 3 = 8 + 9 = 17 A4 = a + 4d = 8 + 4 3 = 8 + 12 = 20 A5 = a + 5d = 8 + 5 3 = 8 + 15 = 23 Thus, the required five numbers between 8 and 26 are 11, 14, 17, 20, and 23.
Question 15:
If Answer
is the A.M. between a and b, then find the value of n.
A.M. of a and b According to the given condition,
Class XI
Maths
Question 16: Between 1 and 31, m numbers have been inserted in such a way that the resulting sequence is an A.P. and the ratio of 7th and (m 1)th numbers is 5:9. Find the value of m. Answer Let A1, A2, Am be m numbers such that 1, A1, A2, Am, 31 is an A.P. Here, a = 1, b = 31, n = m + 2 31 = 1 + (m + 2 1) (d) 30 = (m + 1) d
A1 = a + d A2 = a + 2d A3 = a + 3d A7 = a + 7d Am1 = a + (m 1) d According to the given condition,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the value of m is 14.
Question 17: A man starts repaying a loan as first installment of Rs. 100. If he increases the installment by Rs 5 every month, what amount he will pay in the 30th installment? Answer The first installment of the loan is Rs 100. The second installment of the loan is Rs 105 and so on. The amount that the man repays every month forms an A.P. The A.P. is 100, 105, 110, First term, a = 100 Common difference, d = 5 A30 = a + (30 1)d = 100 + (29) (5) = 100 + 145 = 245 Thus, the amount to be paid in the 30th installment is Rs 245.
Class XI
Maths
Question 18: The difference between any two consecutive interior angles of a polygon is 5. If the smallest angle is 120, find the number of the sides of the polygon. Answer The angles of the polygon will form an A.P. with common difference d as 5 and first term a as 120. It is known that the sum of all angles of a polygon with n sides is 180 (n 2).
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 9.3
Question 1:
Find the 20th and nthterms of the G.P. Answer
The given G.P. is
Here, a = First term =
r = Common ratio =
Question 2: Find the 12th term of a G.P. whose 8th term is 192 and the common ratio is 2. Answer Common ratio, r = 2 Let a be the first term of the G.P. a8 = ar
81
= ar7
ar7 = 192 a(2)7 = 192 a(2)7 = (2)6 (3)
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: The 5th, 8th and 11th terms of a G.P. are p, q and s, respectively. Show that q2 = ps. Answer Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. According to the given condition, a5 = a r51 = a r4 = p (1) a8 = a r81 = a r7 = q (2) a11 = a r111 = a r10 = s (3) Dividing equation (2) by (1), we obtain
Dividing equation (3) by (2), we obtain
Equating the values of r3 obtained in (4) and (5), we obtain
Question 4: The 4th term of a G.P. is square of its second term, and the first term is 3. Determine its 7th term.
Class XI Answer
Maths
Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. a = 3 It is known that, an = arn1 a4 = ar3 = (3) r3 a2 = a r1 = (3) r According to the given condition, (3) r3 = [(3) r]2 3r3 = 9 r2 r = 3 a7 = a r
71
= a r6 = (3) (3)6 = (3)7 = 2187
Thus, the seventh term of the G.P. is 2187.
Question 5: Which term of the following sequences:
(a) Answer
(b)
(c)
(a) The given sequence is
Here, a = 2 and r = Let the nth term of the given sequence be 128.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the 13th term of the given sequence is 128. (b) The given sequence is
Here, Let the nth term of the given sequence be 729.
Thus, the 12th term of the given sequence is 729.
(c) The given sequence is
Class XI
Maths
Here,
Let the nth term of the given sequence be
Thus, the 9th term of the given sequence is
Question 6:
For what values of x, the numbers Answer
are in G.P?
The given numbers are
Common ratio =
Also, common ratio =
Class XI
Maths
Thus, for x = 1, the given numbers will be in G.P.
Question 7: Find the sum to 20 terms in the geometric progression 0.15, 0.015, 0.0015 Answer The given G.P. is 0.15, 0.015, 0.00015,
Here, a = 0.15 and
Question 8: Find the sum to n terms in the geometric progression Answer The given G.P. is Here,
Class XI
Maths
Question 9: Find the sum to n terms in the geometric progression Answer The given G.P. is Here, first term = a1 = 1 Common ratio = r = a
Question 10: Find the sum to n terms in the geometric progression Answer
Class XI The given G.P. is Here, a = x3 and r = x2
Maths
Question 11:
Evaluate Answer
The terms of this sequence 3, 32, 33, forms a G.P.
Substituting this value in equation (1), we obtain
Question 12:
The sum of first three terms of a G.P. is ratio and the terms. Answer
and their product is 1. Find the common
Class XI
Maths
Let
be the first three terms of the G.P.
From (2), we obtain a3 = 1 a = 1 (Considering real roots only) Substituting a = 1 in equation (1), we obtain
Thus, the three terms of G.P. are
Question 13: How many terms of G.P. 3, 32, 33, are needed to give the sum 120? Answer The given G.P. is 3, 32, 33, Let n terms of this G.P. be required to obtain the sum as 120.
Here, a = 3 and r = 3
Class XI
Maths
n=4 Thus, four terms of the given G.P. are required to obtain the sum as 120.
Question 14: The sum of first three terms of a G.P. is 16 and the sum of the next three terms is 128. Determine the first term, the common ratio and the sum to n terms of the G.P. Answer Let the G.P. be a, ar, ar2, ar3, According to the given condition, a + ar + ar2 = 16 and ar3 + ar4 + ar5 = 128 a (1 + r + r2) = 16 (1) ar3(1 + r + r2) = 128 (2) Dividing equation (2) by (1), we obtain
Substituting r = 2 in (1), we obtain a (1 + 2 + 4) = 16 a (7) = 16
Class XI
Maths
Question 15: Given a G.P. with a = 729 and 7th term 64, determine S7. Answer a = 729 a7 = 64 Let r be the common ratio of the G.P. It is known that, an = a rn1 a7 = ar71 = (729)r6 64 = 729 r6
Also, it is known that,
Class XI
Maths
Question 16: Find a G.P. for which sum of the first two terms is 4 and the fifth term is 4 times the third term. Answer Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. According to the given conditions,
a5 = 4 a 3 ar4 = 4ar2 r2 = 4 r=2 From (1), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the required G.P. is
4, 8, 16, 32,
Question 17: If the 4th, 10th and 16th terms of a G.P. are x, y and z, respectively. Prove that x, y, z are in G.P. Answer Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. According to the given condition, a4 = a r3 = x (1) a10 = a r9 = y (2) a16 = a r15 = z (3) Dividing (2) by (1), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Thus, x, y, z are in G. P.
Question 18: Find the sum to n terms of the sequence, 8, 88, 888, 8888 Answer The given sequence is 8, 88, 888, 8888 This sequence is not a G.P. However, it can be changed to G.P. by writing the terms as Sn = 8 + 88 + 888 + 8888 + .. to n terms
Question 19: Find the sum of the products of the corresponding terms of the sequences 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
and 128, 32, 8, 2, Answer
Required sum =
Class XI
Maths
Here, 4, 2, 1, First term, a = 4
is a G.P.
Common ratio, r =
It is known that,
Required sum =
Question 20: Show that the products of the corresponding terms of the sequences form a G.P, and find the common ratio. Answer It has to be proved that the sequence, aA, arAR, ar2AR2, arn1ARn1, forms a G.P.
Thus, the above sequence forms a G.P. and the common ratio is rR.
Question 21:
Class XI
Maths
Find four numbers forming a geometric progression in which third term is greater than the first term by 9, and the second term is greater than the 4th by 18. Answer Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. a1 = a, a2 = ar, a3 = ar2, a4 = ar3 By the given condition, a3 = a 1 + 9 ar2 = a + 9 (1) a2 = a4 + 18 ar = ar3 + 18 (2) From (1) and (2), we obtain a(r2 1) = 9 (3) ar (1 r2) = 18 (4) Dividing (4) by (3), we obtain
Substituting the value of r in (1), we obtain 4a = a + 9 3a = 9 a=3 Thus, the first four numbers of the G.P. are 3, 3( 2), 3(2)2, and 3(2)3 i.e., 36, 12, and 24.
Question 22: If the terms of a G.P. are a, b and c, respectively. Prove that
Answer Let A be the first term and R be the common ratio of the G.P. According to the given information, ARp1 = a
Class XI ARq1 = b ARr1 = c aqr brp cpq
Maths
= Aqr R(p1) (qr) Arp R(q1) (r-p) Apq R(r 1)(pq) = Aq r + r p + p q R = A0 R0 =1 Thus, the given result is proved.
(pr pr q + r) + (rq r + p pq) + (pr p qr + q)
Question 23: If the first and the nth term of a G.P. are a ad b, respectively, and if P is the product of n terms, prove that P2 = (ab)n. Answer The first term of the G.P is a and the last term is b. Therefore, the G.P. is a, ar, ar2, ar3, arn1, where r is the common ratio. b = arn1 (1) P = Product of n terms = (a) (ar) (ar2) (arn1) = (a a a) (r r2 rn1) = an r
1 + 2 +(n1)
(2)
Here, 1, 2, (n 1) is an A.P.
1 + 2 + .+ (n 1)
Maths
Show that the ratio of the sum of first n terms of a G.P. to the sum of terms from
. Answer Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P.
Since there are n terms from (n +1)th to (2n)th term,
Sum of terms from(n + 1)th to (2n)th term a

n +1
= ar
n+1 1
= arn
Thus, required ratio = Thus, the ratio of the sum of first n terms of a G.P. to the sum of terms from (n + 1)th to
(2n)th term is
Question 25: If a, b, c and d are in G.P. show that Answer a, b, c, d are in G.P. Therefore, bc = ad (1) b2 = ac (2) c2 = bd (3) It has to be proved that, (a2 + b2 + c2) (b2 + c2 + d2) = (ab + bc cd)2 R.H.S. = (ab + bc + cd)2
Class XI
Maths
= (ab + ad + cd)2 [Using (1)] = [ab + d (a + c)]2 = a2b2 + 2abd (a + c) + d2 (a + c)2 = a2b2 +2a2bd + 2acbd + d2(a2 + 2ac + c2) = a2b2 + 2a2c2 + 2b2c2 + d2a2 + 2d2b2 + d2c2 [Using (1) and (2)] = a2b2 + a2c2 + a2c2 + b2c2 + b2c2 + d2a2 + d2b2 + d2b2 + d2c2 = a2b2 + a2c2 + a2d2 + b2 b2 + b2c2 + b2d2 + c2b2 + c2 c2 + c2d2 [Using (2) and (3) and rearranging terms] = a2(b2 + c2 + d2) + b2 (b2 + c2 + d2) + c2 (b2+ c2 + d2) = (a2 + b2 + c2) (b2 + c2 + d2) = L.H.S. L.H.S. = R.H.S.
Question 26: Insert two numbers between 3 and 81 so that the resulting sequence is G.P. Answer Let G1 and G2 be two numbers between 3 and 81 such that the series, 3, G1, G2, 81, forms a G.P. Let a be the first term and r be the common ratio of the G.P. 81 = (3) (r)3 r3 = 27 r = 3 (Taking real roots only) For r = 3, G1 = ar = (3) (3) = 9 G2 = ar2 = (3) (3)2 = 27 Thus, the required two numbers are 9 and 27.
Question 27:
Find the value of n so that Answer
may be the geometric mean between a and b.
Class XI G. M. of a and b is .
Maths
By the given condition, Squaring both sides, we obtain
Question 28: The sum of two numbers is 6 times their geometric mean, show that numbers are in the ratio Answer Let the two numbers be a and b. G.M. = According to the given condition, .
Also,
Class XI
Maths
Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
Substituting the value of a in (1), we obtain
Thus, the required ratio is
Question 29: If A and G be A.M. and G.M., respectively between two positive numbers, prove that the numbers are Answer It is given that A and G are A.M. and G.M. between two positive numbers. Let these two positive numbers be a and b. .
From (1) and (2), we obtain a + b = 2A (3) ab = G2 (4) Substituting the value of a and b from (3) and (4) in the identity (a b)2 = (a + b)2 4ab, we obtain (a b)2 = 4A2 4G2 = 4 (A2G2)
Class XI
Maths
(a b)2 = 4 (A + G) (A G)
Thus, the two numbers are
Question 30: The number of bacteria in a certain culture doubles every hour. If there were 30 bacteria present in the culture originally, how many bacteria will be present at the end of 2nd hour, 4th hour and nth hour? Answer It is given that the number of bacteria doubles every hour. Therefore, the number of bacteria after every hour will form a G.P. Here, a = 30 and r = 2 a3 = ar2 = (30) (2)2 = 120 Therefore, the number of bacteria at the end of 2nd hour will be 120. a5 = ar4 = (30) (2)4 = 480 The number of bacteria at the end of 4th hour will be 480. an +1 = arn = (30) 2n Thus, number of bacteria at the end of nth hour will be 30(2)n.
Question 31: What will Rs 500 amounts to in 10 years after its deposit in a bank which pays annual interest rate of 10% compounded annually? Answer The amount deposited in the bank is Rs 500.
Class XI
Maths
At the end of first year, amount = At the end of 2

nd
= Rs 500 (1.1)
year, amount = Rs 500 (1.1) (1.1)
At the end of 3rd year, amount = Rs 500 (1.1) (1.1) (1.1) and so on Amount at the end of 10 years = Rs 500 (1.1) (1.1) (10 times) = Rs 500(1.1)10
Question 32: If A.M. and G.M. of roots of a quadratic equation are 8 and 5, respectively, then obtain the quadratic equation. Answer Let the root of the quadratic equation be a and b. According to the given condition,
The quadratic equation is given by, x2 x (Sum of roots) + (Product of roots) = 0 x2 x (a + b) + (ab) = 0 x2 16x + 25 = 0 [Using (1) and (2)] Thus, the required quadratic equation is x2 16x + 25 = 0
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 9.4
Question 1: Find the sum to n terms of the series 1 2 + 2 3 + 3 4 + 4 5 + Answer The given series is 1 2 + 2 3 + 3 4 + 4 5 + nth term, an = n ( n + 1)
Question 2: Find the sum to n terms of the series 1 2 3 + 2 3 4 + 3 4 5 + Answer The given series is 1 2 3 + 2 3 4 + 3 4 5 + nth term, an = n ( n + 1) ( n + 2) = (n2 + n) (n + 2) = n3 + 3n2 + 2n
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: Find the sum to n terms of the series 3 12 + 5 22 + 7 32 + Answer The given series is 3 12 + 5 22 + 7 32 + nth term, an = ( 2n + 1) n2 = 2n3 + n2
Class XI
Maths
Question 4:
Find the sum to n terms of the series Answer
The given series is
nth term, an =
Class XI
Maths
Adding the above terms column wise, we obtain
Question 5: Find the sum to n terms of the series Answer The given series is 52 + 62 + 72 + + 202 nth term, an = ( n + 4)2 = n2 + 8n + 16
16th term is (16 + 4)2 = 2022
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Find the sum to n terms of the series 3 8 + 6 11 + 9 14 + Answer The given series is 3 8 + 6 11 + 9 14 + an = (nth term of 3, 6, 9 ) (nth term of 8, 11, 14, ) = (3n) (3n + 5) = 9n2 + 15n
Question 7: Find the sum to n terms of the series 12 + (12 + 22) + (12 + 22 + 32) +
Class XI Answer
Maths
The given series is 12 + (12 + 22) + (12 + 22 + 33 ) + an = (12 + 22 + 33 +.+ n2)
Question 8: Find the sum to n terms of the series whose nth term is given by n (n + 1) (n + 4).
Class XI Answer
Maths
an = n (n + 1) (n + 4) = n(n2 + 5n + 4) = n3 + 5n2 + 4n
Question 9: Find the sum to n terms of the series whose nth terms is given by n2 + 2n Answer an = n 2 + 2 n
Consider The above series 2, 22, 23, is a G.P. with both the first term and common ratio equal to 2.
Therefore, from (1) and (2), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Question 10: Find the sum to n terms of the series whose nth terms is given by (2n 1)2 Answer an = (2n 1)2 = 4n2 4n + 1
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: Show that the sum of (m + n)th and (m n)th terms of an A.P. is equal to twice the mth term. Answer Let a and d be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. It is known that the kth term of an A. P. is given by ak = a + (k 1) d am + n = a + (m + n 1) d am n = a + (m n 1) d am = a + (m 1) d am + n + am n = a + (m + n 1) d + a + (m n 1) d = 2a + (m + n 1 + m n 1) d = 2a + (2m 2) d = 2a + 2 (m 1) d =2 [a + (m 1) d] = 2am Thus, the sum of (m + n)th and (m n)th terms of an A.P. is equal to twice the mth term.
Question 2: If the sum of three numbers in A.P., is 24 and their product is 440, find the numbers. Answer Let the three numbers in A.P. be a d, a, and a + d. According to the given information, (a d) + (a) + (a + d) = 24 (1) 3a = 24 a=8 (a d) a (a + d) = 440 (2) (8 d) (8) (8 + d) = 440 (8 d) (8 + d) = 55
Class XI 64 d2 = 55 d2 = 64 55 = 9 d=3
Maths
Therefore, when d = 3, the numbers are 5, 8, and 11 and when d = 3, the numbers are 11, 8, and 5. Thus, the three numbers are 5, 8, and 11.
Question 3: Let the sum of n, 2n, 3n terms of an A.P. be S1, S2 and S3, respectively, show that S3 = 3 (S2 S1) Answer Let a and b be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. Therefore,
Hence, the given result is proved.
Question 4: Find the sum of all numbers between 200 and 400 which are divisible by 7.
Class XI Answer
Maths
The numbers lying between 200 and 400, which are divisible by 7, are 203, 210, 217, 399 First term, a = 203 Last term, l = 399 Common difference, d = 7 Let the number of terms of the A.P. be n. an = 399 = a + (n 1) d 399 = 203 + (n 1) 7 7 (n 1) = 196 n 1 = 28 n = 29
Thus, the required sum is 8729.
Question 5: Find the sum of integers from 1 to 100 that are divisible by 2 or 5. Answer The integers from 1 to 100, which are divisible by 2, are 2, 4, 6 100. This forms an A.P. with both the first term and common difference equal to 2. 100 = 2 + (n 1) 2 n = 50
Class XI
Maths
The integers from 1 to 100, which are divisible by 5, are 5, 10 100. This forms an A.P. with both the first term and common difference equal to 5. 100 = 5 + (n 1) 5 5n = 100 n = 20
The integers, which are divisible by both 2 and 5, are 10, 20, 100. This also forms an A.P. with both the first term and common difference equal to 10. 100 = 10 + (n 1) (10) 100 = 10n n = 10
Required sum = 2550 + 1050 550 = 3050 Thus, the sum of the integers from 1 to 100, which are divisible by 2 or 5, is 3050.
Question 6: Find the sum of all two digit numbers which when divided by 4, yields 1 as remainder. Answer The two-digit numbers, which when divided by 4, yield 1 as remainder, are 13, 17, 97. This series forms an A.P. with first term 13 and common difference 4. Let n be the number of terms of the A.P. It is known that the nth term of an A.P. is given by, an = a + (n 1) d 97 = 13 + (n 1) (4) 4 (n 1) = 84 n 1 = 21
Class XI n = 22
Maths
Sum of n terms of an A.P. is given by,
Thus, the required sum is 1210.
Question 7: If f is a function satisfying such that
, find the value of n. Answer It is given that, f (x + y) = f (x) f (y) for all x, y N (1) f (1) = 3 Taking x = y = 1 in (1), we obtain f (1 + 1) = f (2) = f (1) f (1) = 3 3 = 9 Similarly, f (1 + 1 + 1) = f (3) = f (1 + 2) = f (1) f (2) = 3 9 = 27 f (4) = f (1 + 3) = f (1) f (3) = 3 27 = 81 f (1), f (2), f (3), , that is 3, 9, 27, , forms a G.P. with both the first term and common ratio equal to 3.
It is known that,
It is given that,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the value of n is 4.
Question 8: The sum of some terms of G.P. is 315 whose first term and the common ratio are 5 and 2, respectively. Find the last term and the number of terms. Answer Let the sum of n terms of the G.P. be 315.
It is known that, It is given that the first term a is 5 and common ratio r is 2.
Last term of the G.P = 6th term = ar6 1 = (5)(2)5 = (5)(32) = 160 Thus, the last term of the G.P. is 160.
Question 9: The first term of a G.P. is 1. The sum of the third term and fifth term is 90. Find the common ratio of G.P. Answer Let a and r be the first term and the common ratio of the G.P. respectively. a=1 a3 = ar2 = r2
Class XI a5 = ar4 = r4 r2 + r4 = 90 r4 + r2 90 = 0
Maths
Thus, the common ratio of the G.P. is 3.
Question 10: The sum of three numbers in G.P. is 56. If we subtract 1, 7, 21 from these numbers in that order, we obtain an arithmetic progression. Find the numbers. Answer Let the three numbers in G.P. be a, ar, and ar2. From the given condition, a + ar + ar2 = 56 a (1 + r + r2) = 56
(1) a 1, ar 7, ar2 21 forms an A.P. (ar 7) (a 1) = (ar2 21) (ar 7) ar a 6 = ar2 ar 14 ar2 2ar + a = 8 ar2 ar ar + a = 8 a(r2 + 1 2r) = 8 a (r 1)2 = 8 (2)
7(r2 2r + 1) = 1 + r + r2 7r2 14 r + 7 1 r r2 = 0 6r2 15r + 6 = 0 6r2 12r 3r + 6 = 0 6r (r 2) 3 (r 2) = 0 (6r 3) (r 2) = 0
Class XI
Maths
When r = 2, a = 8
When Therefore, when r = 2, the three numbers in G.P. are 8, 16, and 32.
When
, the three numbers in G.P. are 32, 16, and 8.
Thus, in either case, the three required numbers are 8, 16, and 32.
Question 11: A G.P. consists of an even number of terms. If the sum of all the terms is 5 times the sum of terms occupying odd places, then find its common ratio. Answer Let the G.P. be T1, T2, T3, T4, T2n. Number of terms = 2n According to the given condition, T1 + T2 + T3 + + T2n = 5 [T1 + T3 + +T2n1] T1 + T2 + T3 + + T2n 5 [T1 + T3 + + T2n1] = 0 T2 + T4 + + T2n = 4 [T1 + T3 + + T2n1] Let the G.P. be a, ar, ar2, ar3,
Thus, the common ratio of the G.P. is 4.
Question 12: The sum of the first four terms of an A.P. is 56. The sum of the last four terms is 112. If its first term is 11, then find the number of terms. Answer Let the A.P. be a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d, ... a + (n 2) d, a + (n 1)d. Sum of first four terms = a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + (a + 3d) = 4a + 6d
Class XI
Maths
Sum of last four terms = [a + (n 4) d] + [a + (n 3) d] + [a + (n 2) d] + [a + n 1) d] = 4a + (4n 10) d According to the given condition, 4a + 6d = 56 4(11) + 6d = 56 [Since a = 11 (given)] 6d = 12 d=2 4a + (4n 10) d = 112 4(11) + (4n 10)2 = 112 (4n 10)2 = 68 4n 10 = 34 4n = 44 n = 11 Thus, the number of terms of the A.P. is 11.
Question 13:
If Answer It is given that,
, then show that a, b, c and d are in G.P.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, a, b, c, and d are in G.P.
Question 14: Let S be the sum, P the product and R the sum of reciprocals of n terms in a G.P. Prove that P2Rn = Sn Answer Let the G.P. be a, ar, ar2, ar3, arn 1 According to the given information,
Class XI
Maths
Hence, P2 Rn = Sn
Question 15: The pth, qth and rth terms of an A.P. are a, b, c respectively. Show that
Answer Let t and d be the first term and the common difference of the A.P. respectively. The nth term of an A.P. is given by, an = t + (n 1) d Therefore, ap = t + (p 1) d = a (1)
Class XI aq = t + (q 1)d = b (2) ar = t + (r 1) d = c (3)
Maths
Subtracting equation (2) from (1), we obtain (p 1 q + 1) d = a b (p q) d = a b
Subtracting equation (3) from (2), we obtain (q 1 r + 1) d = b c (q r) d = b c
Equating both the values of d obtained in (4) and (5), we obtain
Question 16:
If a Answer
are in A.P., prove that a, b, c are in A.P.
It is given that a
are in A.P.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, a, b, and c are in A.P.
Question 17: If a, b, c, d are in G.P, prove that Answer It is given that a, b, c,and d are in G.P. b2 = ac (1) c2 = bd (2) ad = bc (3) It has to be proved that (an + bn), (bn + cn), (cn + dn) are in G.P. i.e., (bn + cn)2 = (an + bn) (cn + dn) Consider L.H.S. (bn + cn)2 = b2n + 2bncn + c2n = (b2)n+ 2bncn + (c2) n = (ac)n + 2bncn + (bd)n [Using (1) and (2)] = an cn + bncn+ bn cn + bn dn = an cn + bncn+ an dn + bn dn [Using (3)] = cn (an + bn) + dn (an + bn) = (an + bn) (cn + dn) = R.H.S. (bn + cn)2 = (an + bn) (cn + dn)
are in G.P.
Class XI
Maths
Thus, (an + bn), (bn + cn), and (cn + dn) are in G.P.
Question 18: If a and b are the roots of are roots of , where a,
b, c, d, form a G.P. Prove that (q + p): (q p) = 17:15. Answer It is given that a and b are the roots of x2 3x + p = 0 a + b = 3 and ab = p (1) Also, c and d are the roots of c + d = 12 and cd = q (2) It is given that a, b, c, d are in G.P. Let a = x, b = xr, c = xr2, d = xr3 From (1) and (2), we obtain x + xr = 3 x (1 + r) = 3 xr2 + xr3 =12 xr2 (1 + r) = 12 On dividing, we obtain
Case I: When r = 2 and x =1, ab = x2r = 2 cd = x2r5 = 32
Class XI
Maths
Case II: When r = 2, x = 3, ab = x2r = 18 cd = x2r5 = 288
Thus, in both the cases, we obtain (q + p): (q p) = 17:15
Question 19: The ratio of the A.M and G.M. of two positive numbers a and b, is m: n. Show that
. Answer Let the two numbers be a and b.
A.M
and G.M. =
According to the given condition,
Using this in the identity (a b)2 = (a + b)2 4ab, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
Question 20:
If a, b, c are in A.P,; b, c, d are in G.P and G.P. Answer It is given that a, b, c are in A.P. b a = c b (1) It is given that b, c, d, are in G.P. c2 = bd (2)
are in A.P. prove that a, c, e are in
Class XI
Maths
Also,
are in A.P.
It has to be proved that a, c, e are in G.P. i.e., c2 = ae From (1), we obtain
From (2), we obtain
Substituting these values in (3), we obtain
Thus, a, c, and e are in G.P.
Question 21: Find the sum of the following series up to n terms: (i) 5 + 55 + 555 + (ii) .6 +.66 +. 666 + Answer (i) 5 + 55 + 555 +
Class XI
Maths
Let Sn = 5 + 55 + 555 + .. to n terms
(ii) .6 +.66 +. 666 + Let Sn = 06. + 0.66 + 0.666 + to n terms
Question 22:
Class XI
Maths
Find the 20th term of the series 2 4 + 4 6 + 6 8 + + n terms. Answer The given series is 2 4 + 4 6 + 6 8 + n terms nth term = an = 2n (2n + 2) = 4n2 + 4n a20 = 4 (20)2 + 4(20) = 4 (400) + 80 = 1600 + 80 = 1680 Thus, the 20th term of the series is 1680.
Question 23: Find the sum of the first n terms of the series: 3 + 7 + 13 + 21 + 31 + Answer The given series is 3 + 7 + 13 + 21 + 31 + S = 3 + 7 + 13 + 21 + 31 + + an1 + an S = 3 + 7 + 13 + 21 + . + an 2 + an 1 + an On subtracting both the equations, we obtain S S = [3 + (7 + 13 + 21 + 31 + + an1 + an)] [(3 + 7 + 13 + 21 + 31 + + an1) + an] S S = 3 + [(7 3) + (13 7) + (21 13) + + (an an1)] an 0 = 3 + [4 + 6 + 8 + (n 1) terms] an an = 3 + [4 + 6 + 8 + (n 1) terms]
Class XI
Maths
Question 24: If S1, S2, S3 are the sum of first n natural numbers, their squares and their cubes, respectively, show that Answer From the given information,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, from (1) and (2), we obtain
Question 25:
Find the sum of the following series up to n terms: Answer
The nth term of the given series is
Class XI
Maths
Question 26:
Show that Answer nth term of the numerator = n(n + 1)2 = n3 + 2n2 + n nth term of the denominator = n2(n + 1) = n3 + n2
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
Question 27: A farmer buys a used tractor for Rs 12000. He pays Rs 6000 cash and agrees to pay the balance in annual installments of Rs 500 plus 12% interest on the unpaid amount. How much will be the tractor cost him? Answer It is given that the farmer pays Rs 6000 in cash. Therefore, unpaid amount = Rs 12000 Rs 6000 = Rs 6000 According to the given condition, the interest paid annually is 12% of 6000, 12% of 5500, 12% of 5000, , 12% of 500 Thus, total interest to be paid = 12% of 6000 + 12% of 5500 + 12% of 5000 + + 12% of 500 = 12% of (6000 + 5500 + 5000 + + 500)
Class XI
Maths
= 12% of (500 + 1000 + 1500 + + 6000) Now, the series 500, 1000, 1500 6000 is an A.P. with both the first term and common difference equal to 500. Let the number of terms of the A.P. be n. 6000 = 500 + (n 1) 500 1 + (n 1) = 12 n = 12
Sum of the A.P Thus, total interest to be paid = 12% of (500 + 1000 + 1500 + + 6000) = 12% of 39000 = Rs 4680 Thus, cost of tractor = (Rs 12000 + Rs 4680) = Rs 16680
Question 28: Shamshad Ali buys a scooter for Rs 22000. He pays Rs 4000 cash and agrees to pay the balance in annual installment of Rs 1000 plus 10% interest on the unpaid amount. How much will the scooter cost him? Answer It is given that Shamshad Ali buys a scooter for Rs 22000 and pays Rs 4000 in cash. Unpaid amount = Rs 22000 Rs 4000 = Rs 18000 According to the given condition, the interest paid annually is 10% of 18000, 10% of 17000, 10% of 16000 10% of 1000 Thus, total interest to be paid = 10% of 18000 + 10% of 17000 + 10% of 16000 + + 10% of 1000 = 10% of (18000 + 17000 + 16000 + + 1000) = 10% of (1000 + 2000 + 3000 + + 18000) Here, 1000, 2000, 3000 18000 forms an A.P. with first term and common difference both equal to 1000. Let the number of terms be n. 18000 = 1000 + (n 1) (1000) n = 18
Class XI
Maths
Total interest paid = 10% of (18000 + 17000 + 16000 + + 1000) = 10% of Rs 171000 = Rs 17100 Cost of scooter = Rs 22000 + Rs 17100 = Rs 39100
Question 29: A person writes a letter to four of his friends. He asks each one of them to copy the letter and mail to four different persons with instruction that they move the chain similarly. Assuming that the chain is not broken and that it costs 50 paise to mail one letter. Find the amount spent on the postage when 8th set of letter is mailed. Answer The numbers of letters mailed forms a G.P.: 4, 42, 48 First term = 4 Common ratio = 4 Number of terms = 8 It is known that the sum of n terms of a G.P. is given by
It is given that the cost to mail one letter is 50 paisa.
Cost of mailing 87380 letters
= Rs 43690
Thus, the amount spent when 8th set of letter is mailed is Rs 43690.
Question 30: A man deposited Rs 10000 in a bank at the rate of 5% simple interest annually. Find the amount in 15th year since he deposited the amount and also calculate the total amount after 20 years.
Class XI Answer
Maths
It is given that the man deposited Rs 10000 in a bank at the rate of 5% simple interest annually.
Interest in first year Amount in 15th year = Rs = Rs 10000 + 14 Rs 500 = Rs 10000 + Rs 7000 = Rs 17000
Amount after 20 years = = Rs 10000 + 20 Rs 500 = Rs 10000 + Rs 10000 = Rs 20000
Question 31: A manufacturer reckons that the value of a machine, which costs him Rs 15625, will depreciate each year by 20%. Find the estimated value at the end of 5 years. Answer Cost of machine = Rs 15625 Machine depreciates by 20% every year.
Therefore, its value after every year is 80% of the original cost i.e., cost.
of the original
Value at the end of 5 years =
= 5 1024 = 5120
Thus, the value of the machine at the end of 5 years is Rs 5120.
Question 32: 150 workers were engaged to finish a job in a certain number of days. 4 workers dropped out on second day, 4 more workers dropped out on third day and so on. It took
Class XI
Maths
8 more days to finish the work. Find the number of days in which the work was completed. Answer Let x be the number of days in which 150 workers finish the work. According to the given information, 150x = 150 + 146 + 142 + . (x + 8) terms The series 150 + 146 + 142 + . (x + 8) terms is an A.P. with first term 146, common difference 4 and number of terms as (x + 8)
However, x cannot be negative. x = 17 Therefore, originally, the number of days in which the work was completed is 17. Thus, required number of days = (17 + 8) = 25
Class XI
Chapter 10 Straight Lines
Maths
Exercise 10.1
Question 1: Draw a quadrilateral in the Cartesian plane, whose vertices are (4, 5), (0, 7), (5, 5) and (4, 2). Also, find its area. Answer Let ABCD be the given quadrilateral with vertices A (4, 5), B (0, 7), C (5, 5), and D ( 4, 2). Then, by plotting A, B, C, and D on the Cartesian plane and joining AB, BC, CD, and DA, the given quadrilateral can be drawn as
To find the area of quadrilateral ABCD, we draw one diagonal, say AC. Accordingly, area (ABCD) = area (ABC) + area (ACD) We know that the area of a triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), and (x3, y3) is
Therefore, area of ABC
Class XI
Maths
Area of ACD
Thus, area (ABCD)
Question 2: The base of an equilateral triangle with side 2a lies along they y-axis such that the mid point of the base is at the origin. Find vertices of the triangle. Answer Let ABC be the given equilateral triangle with side 2a. Accordingly, AB = BC = CA = 2a Assume that base BC lies along the y-axis such that the mid-point of BC is at the origin. i.e., BO = OC = a, where O is the origin. Now, it is clear that the coordinates of point C are (0, a), while the coordinates of point B are (0, a).
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the line joining a vertex of an equilateral triangle with the mid-point of its opposite side is perpendicular. Hence, vertex A lies on the y-axis.
On applying Pythagoras theorem to AOC, we obtain (AC)2 = (OA)2 + (OC)2 (2a)2 = (OA)2 + a2 4a2 a2 = (OA)2 (OA)2 = 3a2 OA = Coordinates of point A = Thus, the vertices of the given equilateral triangle are (0, a), (0, a), and (0, a), (0, a), and . or
Question 3: Find the distance between (ii) PQ is parallel to the x-axis. Answer The given points are and . and when: (i) PQ is parallel to the y-axis,
(i) When PQ is parallel to the y-axis, x1 = x2.

Class XI
Maths
In this case, distance between P and Q
(ii) When PQ is parallel to the x-axis, y1 = y2. In this case, distance between P and Q
Question 4: Find a point on the x-axis, which is equidistant from the points (7, 6) and (3, 4). Answer Let (a, 0) be the point on the x axis that is equidistant from the points (7, 6) and (3, 4).
On squaring both sides, we obtain a2 14a + 85 = a2 6a + 25 14a + 6a = 25 85 8a = 60
Thus, the required point on the x-axis is
Question 5: Find the slope of a line, which passes through the origin, and the mid-point of the line segment joining the points P (0, 4) and B (8, 0). Answer
Class XI
Maths
The coordinates of the mid-point of the line segment joining the points
P (0, 4) and B (8, 0) are It is known that the slope (m) of a non-vertical line passing through the points (x1, y1)
and (x2, y2) is given by
Therefore, the slope of the line passing through (0, 0) and (4, 2) is
Hence, the required slope of the line is
Question 6: Without using the Pythagoras theorem, show that the points (4, 4), (3, 5) and (1, 1) are the vertices of a right angled triangle. Answer The vertices of the given triangle are A (4, 4), B (3, 5), and C (1, 1). It is known that the slope (m) of a non-vertical line passing through the points (x1, y1)
and (x2, y2) is given by
Slope of AB (m1)
Slope of BC (m2)
Slope of CA (m3) It is observed that m1m3 = 1 This shows that line segments AB and CA are perpendicular to each other i.e., the given triangle is right-angled at A (4, 4). Thus, the points (4, 4), (3, 5), and (1, 1) are the vertices of a right-angled triangle.
Maths
Find the slope of the line, which makes an angle of 30 with the positive direction of yaxis measured anticlockwise. Answer If a line makes an angle of 30 with the positive direction of the y-axis measured anticlockwise, then the angle made by the line with the positive direction of the x-axis measured anticlockwise is 90 + 30 = 120.
Thus, the slope of the given line is tan 120 = tan (180 60) = tan 60
Question 8: Find the value of x for which the points (x, 1), (2, 1) and (4, 5) are collinear. Answer If points A (x, 1), B (2, 1), and C (4, 5) are collinear, then Slope of AB = Slope of BC
Thus, the required value of x is 1.
Maths
Without using distance formula, show that points (2, 1), (4, 0), (3, 3) and (3, 2) are vertices of a parallelogram. Answer Let points (2, 1), (4, 0), (3, 3), and (3, 2) be respectively denoted by A, B, C, and D.
Slope of AB
Slope of CD = Slope of AB = Slope of CD AB and CD are parallel to each other.
Now, slope of BC =
Slope of AD = Slope of BC = Slope of AD BC and AD are parallel to each other. Therefore, both pairs of opposite sides of quadrilateral ABCD are parallel. Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram. Thus, points (2, 1), (4, 0), (3, 3), and (3, 2) are the vertices of a parallelogram.
Question 10: Find the angle between the x-axis and the line joining the points (3, 1) and (4, 2). Answer
The slope of the line joining the points (3, 1) and (4, 2) is Now, the inclination ( ) of the line joining the points (3, 1) and (4, 2) is given by
Class XI tan = 1 = (90 + 45) = 135
Maths
Thus, the angle between the x-axis and the line joining the points (3, 1) and (4, 2) is 135.
Question 11: The slope of a line is double of the slope of another line. If tangent of the angle between
them is Answer Let
, find the slopes of he lines.
be the slopes of the two given lines such that
We know that if isthe angle between the lines l1 and l2 with slopes m1 and m2, then
It is given that the tangent of the angle between the two lines is
Case I
Class XI
Maths
If m = 1, then the slopes of the lines are 1 and 2.
If m = Case II
, then the slopes of the lines are
and 1.
If m = 1, then the slopes of the lines are 1 and 2.
If m =
, then the slopes of the lines are
Hence, the slopes of the lines are 1 and 2 or
and 1 or 1 and 2 or
Question 12: A line passes through . Answer . If slope of the line is m, show that
The slope of the line passing through It is given that the slope of the line is m.
is
Hence,
Class XI
Maths
Question 13:
If three point (h, 0), (a, b) and (0, k) lie on a line, show that Answer If the points A (h, 0), B (a, b), and C (0, k) lie on a line, then Slope of AB = Slope of BC
On dividing both sides by kh, we obtain
Hence,
Question 14: Consider the given population and year graph. Find the slope of the line AB and using it, find what will be the population in the year 2010?
Class XI Answer
Maths
Since line AB passes through points A (1985, 92) and B (1995, 97), its slope is
Let y be the population in the year 2010. Then, according to the given graph, line AB must pass through point C (2010, y). Slope of AB = Slope of BC
Thus, the slope of line AB is crores.
, while in the year 2010, the population will be 104.5
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 10.2
Question 1: Write the equations for the x and y-axes. Answer The y-coordinate of every point on the x-axis is 0. Therefore, the equation of the x-axis is y = 0. The x-coordinate of every point on the y-axis is 0. Therefore, the equation of the y-axis is y = 0.
Question 2:
Find the equation of the line which passes through the point (4, 3) with slope Answer We know that the equation of the line passing through point is .
, whose slope is m,
Thus, the equation of the line passing through point (4, 3), whose slope is
, is
Question 3: Find the equation of the line which passes though (0, 0) with slope m. Answer We know that the equation of the line passing through point is . , whose slope is m,
Thus, the equation of the line passing through point (0, 0), whose slope is m,is
Class XI (y 0) = m(x 0) i.e., y = mx
Maths
Question 4: Find the equation of the line which passes though axis at an angle of 75. Answer The slope of the line that inclines with the x-axis at an angle of 75 is m = tan 75 and is inclined with the x-
We know that the equation of the line passing through point is .
, whose slope is m,
Thus, if a line passes though
and inclines with the x-axis at an angle of 75,
then the equation of the line is given as
Question 5: Find the equation of the line which intersects the x-axis at a distance of 3 units to the left of origin with slope 2.
Class XI Answer
Maths
It is known that if a line with slope m makes x-intercept d, then the equation of the line is given as y = m(x d) For the line intersecting the x-axis at a distance of 3 units to the left of the origin, d = 3. The slope of the line is given as m = 2 Thus, the required equation of the given line is y = 2 [x (3)] y = 2x 6 i.e., 2x + y + 6 = 0
Question 6: Find the equation of the line which intersects the y-axis at a distance of 2 units above the origin and makes an angle of 30 with the positive direction of the x-axis. Answer It is known that if a line with slope m makes y-intercept c, then the equation of the line is given as y = mx + c
Here, c = 2 and m = tan 30
Thus, the required equation of the given line is
Question 7: Find the equation of the line which passes through the points (1, 1) and (2, 4). Answer
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the equation of the line passing through points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is
. Therefore, the equation of the line passing through the points (1, 1) and (2, 4) is
Question 8: Find the equation of the line which is at a perpendicular distance of 5 units from the origin and the angle made by the perpendicular with the positive x-axis is 30 Answer If p is the length of the normal from the origin to a line and is the angle made by the normal with the positive direction of the x-axis, then the equation of the line is given by xcos + y sin = p. Here, p = 5 units and = 30 Thus, the required equation of the given line is x cos 30 + y sin 30 = 5
Question 9: The vertices of PQR are P (2, 1), Q (2, 3) and R (4, 5). Find equation of the median through the vertex R. Answer It is given that the vertices of PQR are P (2, 1), Q (2, 3), and R (4, 5). Let RL be the median through vertex R.
Class XI
Maths
Accordingly, L is the mid-point of PQ.
By mid-point formula, the coordinates of point L are given by
It is known that the equation of the line passing through points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is
. Therefore, the equation of RL can be determined by substituting (x1, y1) = (4, 5) and (x2, y2) = (0, 2).
Hence,
Thus, the required equation of the median through vertex R is
Question 10: Find the equation of the line passing through (3, 5) and perpendicular to the line through the points (2, 5) and (3, 6). Answer
The slope of the line joining the points (2, 5) and (3, 6) is We know that two non-vertical lines are perpendicular to each other if and only if their slopes are negative reciprocals of each other.
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, slope of the line perpendicular to the line through the points (2, 5) and (3,
6) Now, the equation of the line passing through point (3, 5), whose slope is 5, is
Question 11: A line perpendicular to the line segment joining the points (1, 0) and (2, 3) divides it in the ratio 1:n. Find the equation of the line. Answer According to the section formula, the coordinates of the point that divides the line segment joining the points (1, 0) and (2, 3) in the ratio 1: n is given by
The slope of the line joining the points (1, 0) and (2, 3) is
We know that two non-vertical lines are perpendicular to each other if and only if their slopes are negative reciprocals of each other. Therefore, slope of the line that is perpendicular to the line joining the points (1, 0) and
(2, 3)
Now, the equation of the line passing through given by
and whose slope is
is
Class XI
Maths
Question 12: Find the equation of a line that cuts off equal intercepts on the coordinate axes and passes through the point (2, 3). Answer The equation of a line in the intercept form is
Here, a and b are the intercepts on x and y axes respectively. It is given that the line cuts off equal intercepts on both the axes. This means that a = b. Accordingly, equation (i) reduces to
Since the given line passes through point (2, 3), equation (ii) reduces to 2+3=aa=5 On substituting the value of a in equation (ii), we obtain x + y = 5, which is the required equation of the line
Question 13: Find equation of the line passing through the point (2, 2) and cutting off intercepts on the axes whose sum is 9. Answer The equation of a line in the intercept form is
Here, a and b are the intercepts on x and y axes respectively.
Class XI
Maths
It is given thata + b = 9 b = 9 a (ii) From equations (i) and (ii), we obtain
It is given that the line passes through point (2, 2). Therefore, equation (iii) reduces to
If a = 6 and b = 9 6 = 3, then the equation of the line is
If a = 3 and b = 9 3 = 6, then the equation of the line is
Question 14:
Find equation of the line through the point (0, 2) making an angle
with the positive
x-axis. Also, find the equation of line parallel to it and crossing the y-axis at a distance of 2 units below the origin. Answer
Class XI
Maths
The slope of the line making an angle
with the positive x-axis is is
Now, the equation of the line passing through point (0, 2) and having a slope .
The slope of line parallel to line It is given that the line parallel to line origin i.e., it passes through point (0, 2).
is
. crosses the y-axis 2 units below the
Hence, the equation of the line passing through point (0, 2) and having a slope
is
Question 15: The perpendicular from the origin to a line meets it at the point ( 2, 9), find the equation of the line. Answer
The slope of the line joining the origin (0, 0) and point (2, 9) is Accordingly, the slope of the line perpendicular to the line joining the origin and point ( 2, 9) is
Now, the equation of the line passing through point (2, 9) and having a slope m2 is
Class XI
Maths
Question 16: The length L (in centimetre) of a copper rod is a linear function of its Celsius temperature C. In an experiment, if L = 124.942 when C = 20 and L = 125.134 when C = 110, express L in terms of C. Answer It is given that when C = 20, the value of L is 124.942, whereas when C = 110, the value of L is 125.134. Accordingly, points (20, 124.942) and (110, 125.134) satisfy the linear relation between L and C. Now, assuming C along the x-axis and L along the y-axis, we have two points i.e., (20, 124.942) and (110, 125.134) in the XY plane. Therefore, the linear relation between L and C is the equation of the line passing through points (20, 124.942) and (110, 125.134).
(L 124.942) =
Question 17: The owner of a milk store finds that, he can sell 980 litres of milk each week at Rs 14/litre and 1220 litres of milk each week at Rs 16/litre. Assuming a linear relationship between selling price and demand, how many litres could he sell weekly at Rs 17/litre? Answer The relationship between selling price and demand is linear.
Class XI
Maths
Assuming selling price per litre along the x-axis and demand along the y-axis, we have two points i.e., (14, 980) and (16, 1220) in the XY plane that satisfy the linear relationship between selling price and demand. Therefore, the linear relationship between selling price per litre and demand is the equation of the line passing through points (14, 980) and (16, 1220).
When x = Rs 17/litre,
Thus, the owner of the milk store could sell 1340 litres of milk weekly at Rs 17/litre.
Question 18: P (a, b) is the mid-point of a line segment between axes. Show that equation of the line
is Answer Let AB be the line segment between the axes and let P (a, b) be its mid-point.
Let the coordinates of A and B be (0, y) and (x, 0) respectively. Since P (a, b) is the mid-point of AB,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the respective coordinates of A and B are (0, 2b) and (2a, 0). The equation of the line passing through points (0, 2b) and (2a, 0) is
On dividing both sides by ab, we obtain
Thus,the equation of the line is
Question 19: Point R (h, k) divides a line segment between the axes in the ratio 1:2. Find equation of the line. Answer Let AB be the line segment between the axes such that point R (h, k) divides AB in the ratio 1: 2.
Class XI
Maths
Let the respective coordinates of A and B be (x, 0) and (0, y). Since point R (h, k) divides AB in the ratio 1: 2, according to the section formula,
Therefore, the respective coordinates of A and B are
and (0, 3k).
Now, the equation of line AB passing through points (0, 3k) is
and
Thus,the required equation of the line is 2kx + hy = 3hk
Question 20: By using the concept of equation of a line, prove that the three points (3, 0),
Class XI
Maths
(2, 2) and (8, 2) are collinear. Answer In order to show that points (3, 0), (2, 2), and (8, 2) are collinear, it suffices to show that the line passing through points (3, 0) and (2, 2) also passes through point (8, 2). The equation of the line passing through points (3, 0) and (2, 2) is
It is observed that at x = 8 and y = 2, L.H.S. = 2 8 5 2 = 16 10 = 6 = R.H.S. Therefore, the line passing through points (3, 0) and (2, 2) also passes through point (8, 2). Hence, points (3, 0), (2, 2), and (8, 2) are collinear.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 10.3
Question 1: Reduce the following equations into slope-intercept form and find their slopes and the yintercepts. (i) x + 7y = 0 (ii) 6x + 3y 5 = 0 (iii) y = 0 Answer (i) The given equation is x + 7y = 0. It can be written as
This equation is of the form y = mx + c, where
Therefore, equation (1) is in the slope-intercept form, where the slope and the y-
intercept are
and 0 respectively.
(ii) The given equation is 6x + 3y 5 = 0. It can be written as
Therefore, equation (2) is in the slope-intercept form, where the slope and the y-
intercept are2 and
respectively.
(iii) The given equation is y = 0. It can be written as

Class XI y = 0.x + 0 (3)
Maths
This equation is of the form y = mx + c, where m = 0 and c = 0. Therefore, equation (3) is in the slope-intercept form, where the slope and the yintercept are 0 and 0 respectively.
Question 2: Reduce the following equations into intercept form and find their intercepts on the axes. (i) 3x + 2y 12 = 0 (ii) 4x 3y = 6 (iii) 3y + 2 = 0. Answer (i) The given equation is 3x + 2y 12 = 0. It can be written as
This equation is of the form
, where a = 4 and b = 6.
Therefore, equation (1) is in the intercept form, where the intercepts on the x and y axes are 4 and 6 respectively. (ii) The given equation is 4x 3y = 6. It can be written as
, where a =
and b = 2.
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, equation (2) is in the intercept form, where the intercepts on the x and y axes
are
and 2 respectively.
(iii) The given equation is 3y + 2 = 0. It can be written as
, where a = 0 and b =
Therefore, equation (3) is in the intercept form, where the intercept on the y-axis is and it has no intercept on the x-axis.
Question 3: Reduce the following equations into normal form. Find their perpendicular distances from the origin and angle between perpendicular and the positive x-axis. (i) Answer (i) The given equation is It can be reduced as: . (ii) y 2 = 0 (iii) x y = 4
On dividing both sides by
, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Equation (1) is in the normal form. On comparing equation (1) with the normal form of equation of line x cos + y sin = p, we obtain = 120 and p = 4. Thus, the perpendicular distance of the line from the origin is 4, while the angle between the perpendicular and the positive x-axis is 120. (ii) The given equation is y 2 = 0. It can be reduced as 0.x + 1.y = 2 On dividing both sides by x cos 90 + y sin 90 = 2 (1) Equation (1) is in the normal form. On comparing equation (1) with the normal form of equation of line x cos + y sin = p, we obtain = 90 and p = 2. Thus, the perpendicular distance of the line from the origin is 2, while the angle between the perpendicular and the positive x-axis is 90. (iii) The given equation is x y = 4. It can be reduced as 1.x + (1) y = 4 On dividing both sides by , we obtain , we obtain 0.x + 1.y = 2
Equation (1) is in the normal form. On comparing equation (1) with the normal form of equation of line x cos + y sin = p, we obtain = 315 and
Class XI
Chapter 10 Straight Lines , while the angle
Maths
Thus, the perpendicular distance of the line from the origin is between the perpendicular and the positive x-axis is 315.
Question 4: Find the distance of the point (1, 1) from the line 12(x + 6) = 5(y 2). Answer The given equation of the line is 12(x + 6) = 5(y 2). 12x + 72 = 5y 10 12x 5y + 82 = 0 (1) On comparing equation (1) with general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = 12, B = 5, and C = 82. It is known that the perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point
(x1, y1) is given by The given point is (x1, y1) = (1, 1).
Therefore, the distance of point (1, 1) from the given line
Question 5:
Find the points on the x-axis, whose distances from the line Answer The given equation of line is
are 4 units.
On comparing equation (1) with general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = 4, B = 3, and C = 12. Let (a, 0) be the point on the x-axis whose distance from the given line is 4 units.
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point
(x1, y1) is given by Therefore,
Thus, the required points on the x-axis are (2, 0) and (8, 0).
Question 6: Find the distance between parallel lines (i) 15x + 8y 34 = 0 and 15x + 8y + 31 = 0 (ii) l (x + y) + p = 0 and l (x + y) r = 0 Answer It is known that the distance (d) between parallel lines Ax + By + C1 = 0 and Ax + By +
C2 = 0 is given by
(i) The given parallel lines are 15x + 8y 34 = 0 and 15x + 8y + 31 = 0. Here, A = 15, B = 8, C1 = 34, and C2 = 31. Therefore, the distance between the parallel lines is
(ii) The given parallel lines are l (x + y) + p = 0 and l (x + y) r = 0. lx + ly + p = 0 and lx + ly r = 0 Here, A = l, B = l, C1 = p, and C2 = r.
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the distance between the parallel lines is
Question 7: Find equation of the line parallel to the line 3x 4y + 2 = 0 and passing through the point (2, 3). Answer The equation of the given line is
, which is of the form y = mx + c
Slope of the given line It is known that parallel lines have the same slope.
Slope of the other line =
Now, the equation of the line that has a slope of is
and passes through the point (2, 3)
Question 8: Find equation of the line perpendicular to the line x 7y + 5 = 0 and having x intercept 3. Answer The given equation of line is .
Class XI
Maths
Slope of the given line
The slope of the line perpendicular to the line having a slope of
is
The equation of the line with slope 7 and x-intercept 3 is given by y = m (x d) y = 7 (x 3) y = 7x + 21 7x + y = 21
Question 9: Find angles between the lines Answer The given lines are .
The slope of line (1) is
, while the slope of line (2) is
The acute angle i.e., between the two lines is given by
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the angle between the given lines is either 30 or 180 30 = 150.
Question 10: The line through the points (h, 3) and (4, 1) intersects the line 7x 9y 19 = 0. at right angle. Find the value of h. Answer The slope of the line passing through points (h, 3) and (4, 1) is
The slope of line 7x 9y 19 = 0 or It is given that the two lines are perpendicular.
is
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the value of h is
Question 11: Prove that the line through the point (x1, y1) and parallel to the line Ax + By + C = 0 is A (x x1) + B (y y1) = 0. Answer
The slope of line Ax + By + C = 0 or It is known that parallel lines have the same slope.
is
Slope of the other line =
The equation of the line passing through point (x1, y1) and having a slope
is
Hence, the line through point (x1, y1) and parallel to line Ax + By + C = 0 is A (x x1) + B (y y1) = 0
Question 12:
Class XI
Maths
Two lines passing through the point (2, 3) intersects each other at an angle of 60. If slope of one line is 2, find equation of the other line. Answer It is given that the slope of the first line, m1 = 2. Let the slope of the other line be m2. The angle between the two lines is 60.
The equation of the line passing through point (2, 3) and having a slope of
is
Class XI
Maths
In this case, the equation of the other line is
The equation of the line passing through point (2, 3) and having a slope of
is
In this case, the equation of the other line is Thus, the required equation of the other line is .
. or
Question 13: Find the equation of the right bisector of the line segment joining the points (3, 4) and (1, 2). Answer The right bisector of a line segment bisects the line segment at 90. The end-points of the line segment are given as A (3, 4) and B (1, 2).
Accordingly, mid-point of AB
Slope of AB
Class XI
Maths
Slope of the line perpendicular to AB = The equation of the line passing through (1, 3) and having a slope of 2 is (y 3) = 2 (x 1) y 3 = 2x + 2 2x + y = 5 Thus, the required equation of the line is 2x + y = 5.
Question 14: Find the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular from the point (1, 3) to the line 3x 4y 16 = 0. Answer Let (a, b) be the coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular from the point (1, 3) to the line 3x 4y 16 = 0.
Slope of the line joining (1, 3) and (a, b), m1
Slope of the line 3x 4y 16 = 0 or Since these two lines are perpendicular, m1m2 = 1
Class XI
Maths
Point (a, b) lies on line 3x 4y = 16. 3a 4b = 16 (2) On solving equations (1) and (2), we obtain
Thus, the required coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular are
Question 15: The perpendicular from the origin to the line y = mx + c meets it at the point (1, 2). Find the values of m and c. Answer The given equation of line is y = mx + c. It is given that the perpendicular from the origin meets the given line at (1, 2). Therefore, the line joining the points (0, 0) and (1, 2) is perpendicular to the given line.
Slope of the line joining (0, 0) and (1, 2) The slope of the given line is m.
Since point (1, 2) lies on the given line, it satisfies the equation y = mx + c.
Thus, the respective values of m and c are
Question 16:
Class XI
Maths
If p and q are the lengths of perpendiculars from the origin to the lines x cos y sin = k cos 2 and x sec + y cosec = k, respectively, prove that p2 + 4q2 = k2 Answer The equations of given lines are x cos y sin = k cos 2 (1) x sec + y cosec = k (2) The perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point (x1, y1) is given by
. On comparing equation (1) to the general equation of line i.e., Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = cos, B = sin, and C = k cos 2. It is given that p is the length of the perpendicular from (0, 0) to line (1).
On comparing equation (2) to the general equation of line i.e., Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = sec, B = cosec, and C = k. It is given that q is the length of the perpendicular from (0, 0) to line (2).
From (3) and (4), we have
Class XI
Maths
Hence, we proved that p2 + 4q2 = k2.
Question 17: In the triangle ABC with vertices A (2, 3), B (4, 1) and C (1, 2), find the equation and length of altitude from the vertex A. Answer Let AD be the altitude of triangle ABC from vertex A. Accordingly, ADBC
Class XI
Maths
The equation of the line passing through point (2, 3) and having a slope of 1 is (y 3) = 1(x 2) xy+1=0 yx=1 Therefore, equation of the altitude from vertex A = y x = 1. Length of AD = Length of the perpendicular from A (2, 3) to BC The equation of BC is
The perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point (x1, y1) is given by
. On comparing equation (1) to the general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = 1, B = 1, and C = 3.
Length of AD Thus, the equation and the length of the altitude from vertex A are y x = 1 and units respectively.
Class XI
Maths
Question 18: If p is the length of perpendicular from the origin to the line whose intercepts on the
axes are a and b, then show that Answer
It is known that the equation of a line whose intercepts on the axes are a and b is
The perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point (x1, y1) is given by
. On comparing equation (1) to the general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = b, B = a, and C = ab. Therefore, if p is the length of the perpendicular from point (x1, y1) = (0, 0) to line (1), we obtain
On squaring both sides, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Hence, we showed that

Question 1: Find the values of k for which the line (a) Parallel to the x-axis, (b) Parallel to the y-axis, (c) Passing through the origin. Answer The given equation of line is (k 3) x (4 k2) y + k2 7k + 6 = 0 (1) (a) If the given line is parallel to the x-axis, then Slope of the given line = Slope of the x-axis The given line can be written as (4 k2) y = (k 3) x + k2 7k + 6 = 0 is
, which is of the form y = mx + c.
Slope of the given line = Slope of the x-axis = 0
Thus, if the given line is parallel to the x-axis, then the value of k is 3. (b) If the given line is parallel to the y-axis, it is vertical. Hence, its slope will be undefined.
The slope of the given line is
Class XI
Maths
Now, k2 = 4 k = 2
is undefined at k2 = 4
Thus, if the given line is parallel to the y-axis, then the value of k is 2. (c) If the given line is passing through the origin, then point (0, 0) satisfies the given equation of line.
Thus, if the given line is passing through the origin, then the value of k is either 1 or 6.
Question 2: Find the values of and p, if the equation line Answer The equation of the given line is This equation can be reduced as . . is the normal form of the
On dividing both sides by
, we obtain
On comparing equation (1) to
, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Since the values of sin and cos are negative,
Thus, the respective values of and p are
and 1
Question 3: Find the equations of the lines, which cut-off intercepts on the axes whose sum and product are 1 and 6, respectively. Answer Let the intercepts cut by the given lines on the axes be a and b. It is given that a + b = 1 (1) ab = 6 (2) On solving equations (1) and (2), we obtain a = 3 and b = 2 or a = 2 and b = 3 It is known that the equation of the line whose intercepts on the axes are a and b is
Case I: a = 3 and b = 2 In this case, the equation of the line is 2x + 3y + 6 = 0, i.e., 2x 3y = 6. Case II: a = 2 and b = 3 In this case, the equation of the line is 3x 2y + 6 = 0, i.e., 3x + 2y = 6. Thus, the required equation of the lines are 2x 3y = 6 and 3x + 2y = 6.
Question 4:
What are the points on the y-axis whose distance from the line Answer
is 4 units.
Let (0, b) be the point on the y-axis whose distance from line
is 4 units.
Class XI
Maths
The given line can be written as 4x + 3y 12 = 0 (1) On comparing equation (1) to the general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we obtain A = 4, B = 3, and C = 12. It is known that the perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point
(x1, y1) is given by
Therefore, if (0, b) is the point on the y-axis whose distance from line units, then:
is 4
Thus, the required points are
and
Question 5: Find the perpendicular distance from the origin to the line joining the points
Answer The equation of the line joining the points is given by
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By + C = 0 from a point
(x1, y1) is given by
Therefore, the perpendicular distance (d) of the given line from point (x1, y1) = (0, 0) is
Question 6:
Class XI
Maths
Find the equation of the line parallel to y-axis and drawn through the point of intersection of the lines x 7y + 5 = 0 and 3x + y = 0. Answer The equation of any line parallel to the y-axis is of the form x = a (1) The two given lines are x 7y + 5 = 0 (2) 3x + y = 0 (3)
On solving equations (2) and (3), we obtain
Therefore,
is the point of intersection of lines (2) and (3).
Since line x = a passes through point
Thus, the required equation of the line is
Question 7:
Find the equation of a line drawn perpendicular to the line where it meets the y-axis. Answer
through the point,
The equation of the given line is
This equation can also be written as 3x + 2y 12 = 0
Slope of the given line
Slope of line perpendicular to the given line

Class XI
Maths
Let the given line intersect the y-axis at (0, y).
On substituting x with 0 in the equation of the given line, we obtain The given line intersects the y-axis at (0, 6).
The equation of the line that has a slope of
and passes through point (0, 6) is
Thus, the required equation of the line is
Question 8: Find the area of the triangle formed by the lines y x = 0, x + y = 0 and x k = 0. Answer The equations of the given lines are y x = 0 (1) x + y = 0 (2) x k = 0 (3) The point of intersection of lines (1) and (2) is given by x = 0 and y = 0 The point of intersection of lines (2) and (3) is given by x = k and y = k The point of intersection of lines (3) and (1) is given by x = k and y = k Thus, the vertices of the triangle formed by the three given lines are (0, 0), (k, k), and (k, k). We know that the area of a triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), and (x3, y3) is
. Therefore, area of the triangle formed by the three given lines
Class XI
Maths
Question 9: Find the value of p so that the three lines 3x + y 2 = 0, px + 2y 3 = 0 and 2x y 3 = 0 may intersect at one point. Answer The equations of the given lines are 3x + y 2 = 0 (1) px + 2y 3 = 0 (2) 2x y 3 = 0 (3) On solving equations (1) and (3), we obtain x = 1 and y = 1 Since these three lines may intersect at one point, the point of intersection of lines (1) and (3) will also satisfy line (2). p (1) + 2 (1) 3 = 0 p23=0 p=5 Thus, the required value of p is 5.
Question 10: If three lines whose equations are concurrent, then show that Answer The equations of the given lines are y = m1x + c1 (1) y = m2x + c2 (2) y = m3x + c3 (3)
Class XI
Maths
On subtracting equation (1) from (2), we obtain
On substituting this value of x in (1), we obtain
is the point of intersection of lines (1) and (2). It is given that lines (1), (2), and (3) are concurrent. Hence, the point of intersection of lines (1) and (2) will also satisfy equation (3).
Hence,
Question 11: Find the equation of the lines through the point (3, 2) which make an angle of 45 with the line x 2y = 3. Answer Let the slope of the required line be m1.
Class XI
Maths
The given line can be written as
Slope of the given line = It is given that the angle between the required line and line x 2y = 3 is 45. We know that if isthe acute angle between lines l1 and l2 with slopes m1 and m2
respectively, then
Case I: m1 = 3 The equation of the line passing through (3, 2) and having a slope of 3 is: y 2 = 3 (x 3) y 2 = 3x 9 3x y = 7
Class XI
Maths
Case II: m1 =
The equation of the line passing through (3, 2) and having a slope of
is:
Thus, the equations of the lines are 3x y = 7 and x + 3y = 9.
Question 12: Find the equation of the line passing through the point of intersection of the lines 4x + 7y 3 = 0 and 2x 3y + 1 = 0 that has equal intercepts on the axes. Answer Let the equation of the line having equal intercepts on the axes be
On solving equations 4x + 7y 3 = 0 and 2x 3y + 1 = 0, we obtain
is the point of intersection of the two given lines.
Since equation (1) passes through point
Equation (1) becomes Thus, the required equation of the line is .
Maths
Show that the equation of the line passing through the origin and making an angle with
the line Answer
Let the equation of the line passing through the origin be y = m1x. If this line makes an angle of with line y = mx + c, then angle is given by
Case I:
Class XI
Maths
Case II:
Therefore, the required line is given by
Question 14: In what ratio, the line joining (1, 1) and (5, 7) is divided by the line x + y = 4? Answer The equation of the line joining the points (1, 1) and (5, 7) is given by
The equation of the given line is x + y 4 = 0 (2) The point of intersection of lines (1) and (2) is given by x = 1 and y = 3 Let point (1, 3) divide the line segment joining (1, 1) and (5, 7) in the ratio 1:k. Accordingly, by section formula,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the line joining the points (1, 1) and (5, 7) is divided by line x + y = 4 in the ratio 1:2.
Question 15: Find the distance of the line 4x + 7y + 5 = 0 from the point (1, 2) along the line 2x y = 0. Answer The given lines are 2x y = 0 (1) 4x + 7y + 5 = 0 (2) A (1, 2) is a point on line (1). Let B be the point of intersection of lines (1) and (2).
Coordinates of point B are
.
Page 57 of 68
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
By using distance formula, the distance between points A and B can be obtained as
Thus, the required distance is
Question 16: Find the direction in which a straight line must be drawn through the point (1, 2) so that its point of intersection with the line x + y = 4 may be at a distance of 3 units from this point. Answer Let y = mx + c be the line through point (1, 2). Accordingly, 2 = m (1) + c. 2 = m + c c=m+2 y = mx + m + 2 (1) The given line is
Class XI x + y = 4 (2)
Maths
is the point of intersection of lines (1) and (2). Since this point is at a distance of 3 units from point ( 1, 2), according to distance formula,
Thus, the slope of the required line must be zero i.e., the line must be parallel to the xaxis.
Question 18: Find the image of the point (3, 8) with respect to the line x + 3y = 7 assuming the line to be a plane mirror. Answer The equation of the given line is x + 3y = 7 (1) Let point B (a, b) be the image of point A (3, 8). Accordingly, line (1) is the perpendicular bisector of AB.
Class XI
Maths
Since line (1) is perpendicular to AB,
The mid-point of line segment AB will also satisfy line (1). Hence, from equation (1), we have
On solving equations (2) and (3), we obtain a = 1 and b = 4. Thus, the image of the given point with respect to the given line is (1, 4).
Question 19: If the lines y = 3x + 1 and 2y = x + 3 are equally inclined to the line y = mx + 4, find the value of m. Answer The equations of the given lines are y = 3x + 1 (1)
Class XI 2y = x + 3 (2) y = mx + 4 (3) Slope of line (1), m1 = 3
Maths
Slope of line (2), Slope of line (3), m3 = m It is given that lines (1) and (2) are equally inclined to line (3). This means that the angle between lines (1) and (3) equals the angle between lines (2) and (3).
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the required value of m is
Question 20: If sum of the perpendicular distances of a variable point P (x, y) from the lines x + y 5 = 0 and 3x 2y + 7 = 0 is always 10. Show that P must move on a line. Answer The equations of the given lines are x + y 5 = 0 (1) 3x 2y + 7 = 0 (2) The perpendicular distances of P (x, y) from lines (1) and (2) are respectively given by
It is given that
Class XI
Maths
, which is the equation of a line. Similarly, we can obtain the equation of line for any signs of Thus, point P must move on a line. .
Question 21: Find equation of the line which is equidistant from parallel lines 9x + 6y 7 = 0 and 3x + 2y + 6 = 0. Answer The equations of the given lines are 9x + 6y 7 = 0 (1) 3x + 2y + 6 = 0 (2) Let P (h, k) be the arbitrary point that is equidistant from lines (1) and (2). The perpendicular distance of P (h, k) from line (1) is given by
The perpendicular distance of P (h, k) from line (2) is given by
Since P (h, k) is equidistant from lines (1) and (2),
Class XI
Maths
9h + 6k 7 = 9h 6k 18 18h + 12k + 11 = 0 Thus, the required equation of the line is 18x + 12y + 11 = 0.
Question 22: A ray of light passing through the point (1, 2) reflects on the x-axis at point A and the reflected ray passes through the point (5, 3). Find the coordinates of A. Answer
Let the coordinates of point A be (a, 0). Draw a line (AL) perpendicular to the x-axis. We know that angle of incidence is equal to angle of reflection. Hence, let BAL = CAL = Let CAX =
Class XI
Maths
OAB = 180 ( + 2) = 180 [ + 2(90 )] = 180 180 + 2 = BAX = 180
From equations (1) and (2), we obtain
Thus, the coordinates of point A are
Question 23: Prove that the product of the lengths of the perpendiculars drawn from the points
Answer The equation of the given line is
Class XI
Maths
Length of the perpendicular from point
to line (1) is
Length of the perpendicular from point
to line (2) is
On multiplying equations (2) and (3), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 24: A person standing at the junction (crossing) of two straight paths represented by the equations 2x 3y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y 5 = 0 wants to reach the path whose equation is 6x 7y + 8 = 0 in the least time. Find equation of the path that he should follow. Answer The equations of the given lines are 2x 3y + 4 = 0 (1) 3x + 4y 5 = 0 (2)
Class XI 6x 7y + 8 = 0 (3)
Maths
The person is standing at the junction of the paths represented by lines (1) and (2).
Thus, the person is standing at point
The person can reach path (3) in the least time if he walks along the perpendicular line
to (3) from point
Slope of the line perpendicular to line (3)
The equation of the line passing through by
and having a slope of
is given
Hence, the path that the person should follow is
Class XI
Chapter 11 Conic Sections
Maths
Exercise 11.1
Question 1: Find the equation of the circle with centre (0, 2) and radius 2 Answer The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and radius r is given as (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 It is given that centre (h, k) = (0, 2) and radius (r) = 2. Therefore, the equation of the circle is (x 0)2 + (y 2)2 = 22 x2 + y2 + 4 4 y = 4 x2 + y2 4y = 0
Question 2: Find the equation of the circle with centre (2, 3) and radius 4 Answer The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and radius r is given as (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 It is given that centre (h, k) = (2, 3) and radius (r) = 4. Therefore, the equation of the circle is (x + 2)2 + (y 3)2 = (4)2 x2 + 4x + 4 + y2 6y + 9 = 16 x2 + y2 + 4x 6y 3 = 0
Question 3:
Find the equation of the circle with centre Answer
and radius
The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and radius r is given as (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2
It is given that centre (h, k) = Therefore, the equation of the circle is
and radius (r) =
Class XI
Maths
Question 4: Find the equation of the circle with centre (1, 1) and radius Answer The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and radius r is given as (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 It is given that centre (h, k) = (1, 1) and radius (r) = Therefore, the equation of the circle is .
Question 5: Find the equation of the circle with centre (a, b) and radius Answer The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and radius r is given as (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 It is given that centre (h, k) = (a, b) and radius (r) = Therefore, the equation of the circle is .
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Find the centre and radius of the circle (x + 5)2 + (y 3)2 = 36 Answer The equation of the given circle is (x + 5)2 + (y 3)2 = 36. (x + 5)2 + (y 3)2 = 36 {x (5)}2 + (y 3)2 = 62, which is of the form (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2, where h = 5, k = 3, and r = 6. Thus, the centre of the given circle is (5, 3), while its radius is 6.
Question 7: Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 4x 8y 45 = 0 Answer The equation of the given circle is x2 + y2 4x 8y 45 = 0. x2 + y2 4x 8y 45 = 0 (x2 4x) + (y2 8y) = 45 {x2 2(x)(2) + 22} + {y2 2(y)(4)+ 42} 4 16 = 45 (x 2)2 + (y 4)2 = 65 (x 2)2 + (y 4)2 = 2, k = 4, and . . , which is of the form (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2, where h =
Thus, the centre of the given circle is (2, 4), while its radius is
Question 8: Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 8x + 10y 12 = 0 Answer The equation of the given circle is x2 + y2 8x + 10y 12 = 0. x2 + y2 8x + 10y 12 = 0
Class XI (x2 8x) + (y2 + 10y) = 12
Maths
{x2 2(x)(4) + 42} + {y2 + 2(y)(5) + 52} 16 25 = 12 (x 4)2 + (y + 5)2 = 53 , which is of the form (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2, where h = 4, k = 5, and . .
Thus, the centre of the given circle is (4, 5), while its radius is
Question 9: Find the centre and radius of the circle 2x2 + 2y2 x = 0 Answer The equation of the given circle is 2x2 + 2y2 x = 0.
, which is of the form (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2, where h =
, k = 0, and
Thus, the centre of the given circle is
, while its radius is
Question 10: Find the equation of the circle passing through the points (4, 1) and (6, 5) and whose centre is on the line 4x + y = 16. Answer Let the equation of the required circle be (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2.
Class XI
Maths
Since the circle passes through points (4, 1) and (6, 5), (4 h)2 + (1 k)2 = r2 (1) (6 h)2 + (5 k)2 = r2 (2) Since the centre (h, k) of the circle lies on line 4x + y = 16, 4h + k = 16 (3) From equations (1) and (2), we obtain (4 h)2 + (1 k)2 = (6 h)2 + (5 k)2 16 8h + h2 + 1 2k + k2 = 36 12h + h2 + 25 10k + k2 16 8h + 1 2k = 36 12h + 25 10k 4h + 8k = 44 h + 2k = 11 (4) On solving equations (3) and (4), we obtain h = 3 and k = 4. On substituting the values of h and k in equation (1), we obtain (4 3)2 + (1 4)2 = r2 (1)2 + ( 3)2 = r2 1 + 9 = r2 r2 = 10 Thus, the equation of the required circle is (x 3)2 + (y 4)2 = x2 6x + 9 + y2 8y + 16 = 10 x2 + y2 6x 8y + 15 = 0
Question 11: Find the equation of the circle passing through the points (2, 3) and (1, 1) and whose centre is on the line x 3y 11 = 0. Answer Let the equation of the required circle be (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2. Since the circle passes through points (2, 3) and (1, 1), (2 h)2 + (3 k)2 = r2 (1) (1 h)2 + (1 k)2 = r2 (2) Since the centre (h, k) of the circle lies on line x 3y 11 = 0,
Class XI h 3k = 11 (3)
Maths
From equations (1) and (2), we obtain (2 h)2 + (3 k)2 = (1 h)2 + (1 k)2 4 4h + h2 + 9 6k + k2 = 1 + 2h + h2 + 1 2k + k2 4 4h + 9 6k = 1 + 2h + 1 2k 6h + 4k = 11 (4)
On substituting the values of h and k in equation (1), we obtain
Thus, the equation of the required circle is
Question 12: Find the equation of the circle with radius 5 whose centre lies on x-axis and passes through the point (2, 3).
Class XI Answer
Maths
Let the equation of the required circle be (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2. Since the radius of the circle is 5 and its centre lies on the x-axis, k = 0 and r = 5. Now, the equation of the circle becomes (x h)2 + y2 = 25. It is given that the circle passes through point (2, 3).
When h = 2, the equation of the circle becomes (x + 2)2 + y2 = 25 x2 + 4x + 4 + y2 = 25 x2 + y2 + 4x 21 = 0 When h = 6, the equation of the circle becomes (x 6)2 + y2 = 25 x2 12x +36 + y2 = 25 x2 + y2 12x + 11 = 0
Question 13: Find the equation of the circle passing through (0, 0) and making intercepts a and b on the coordinate axes. Answer Let the equation of the required circle be (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2. Since the centre of the circle passes through (0, 0), (0 h)2 + (0 k)2 = r2 h2 + k 2 = r2 The equation of the circle now becomes (x h)2 + (y k)2 = h2 + k2. It is given that the circle makes intercepts a and b on the coordinate axes. This means that the circle passes through points (a, 0) and (0, b). Therefore, (a h)2 + (0 k)2 = h2 + k2 (1)
Class XI
Maths
(0 h)2 + (b k)2 = h2 + k2 (2) From equation (1), we obtain a2 2ah + h2 + k2 = h2 + k2 a2 2ah = 0 a(a 2h) = 0 a = 0 or (a 2h) = 0
However, a 0; hence, (a 2h) = 0 h = From equation (2), we obtain h2 + b2 2bk + k2 = h2 + k2 b2 2bk = 0 b(b 2k) = 0 b = 0 or(b 2k) = 0
However, b 0; hence, (b 2k) = 0 k = Thus, the equation of the required circle is
Question 14: Find the equation of a circle with centre (2, 2) and passes through the point (4, 5). Answer The centre of the circle is given as (h, k) = (2, 2). Since the circle passes through point (4, 5), the radius (r) of the circle is the distance between the points (2, 2) and (4, 5).
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the equation of the circle is
Question 15: Does the point (2.5, 3.5) lie inside, outside or on the circle x2 + y2 = 25? Answer The equation of the given circle is x2 + y2 = 25. x2 + y2 = 25 (x 0)2 + (y 0)2 = 52, which is of the form (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2, where h = 0, k = 0, and r = 5. Centre = (0, 0) and radius = 5 Distance between point (2.5, 3.5) and centre (0, 0)
Since the distance between point (2.5, 3.5) and centre (0, 0) of the circle is less than the radius of the circle, point (2.5, 3.5) lies inside the circle.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 11.2
Question 1: Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for y2 = 12x Answer The given equation is y2 = 12x. Here, the coefficient of x is positive. Hence, the parabola opens towards the right. On comparing this equation with y2 = 4ax, we obtain 4a = 12 a = 3 Coordinates of the focus = (a, 0) = (3, 0) Since the given equation involves y2, the axis of the parabola is the x-axis. Equation of direcctrix, x = a i.e., x = 3 i.e., x + 3 = 0 Length of latus rectum = 4a = 4 3 = 12
Question 2: Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for x2 = 6y Answer The given equation is x2 = 6y. Here, the coefficient of y is positive. Hence, the parabola opens upwards. On comparing this equation with x2 = 4ay, we obtain
Coordinates of the focus = (0, a) = Since the given equation involves x2, the axis of the parabola is the y-axis.
Equation of directrix, Length of latus rectum = 4a = 6
Question 3:
Class XI
Maths
Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for y2 = 8x Answer The given equation is y2 = 8x. Here, the coefficient of x is negative. Hence, the parabola opens towards the left. On comparing this equation with y2 = 4ax, we obtain 4a = 8 a = 2 Coordinates of the focus = (a, 0) = (2, 0) Since the given equation involves y2, the axis of the parabola is the x-axis. Equation of directrix, x = a i.e., x = 2 Length of latus rectum = 4a = 8
Question 4: Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for x2 = 16y Answer The given equation is x2 = 16y. Here, the coefficient of y is negative. Hence, the parabola opens downwards. On comparing this equation with x2 = 4ay, we obtain 4a = 16 a = 4 Coordinates of the focus = (0, a) = (0, 4) Since the given equation involves x2, the axis of the parabola is the y-axis. Equation of directrix, y = a i.e., y = 4 Length of latus rectum = 4a = 16
Question 5: Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for y2 = 10x Answer The given equation is y2 = 10x. Here, the coefficient of x is positive. Hence, the parabola opens towards the right. On comparing this equation with y2 = 4ax, we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Coordinates of the focus = (a, 0) Since the given equation involves y2, the axis of the parabola is the x-axis.
Question 6: Find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the parabola, the equation of directrix and the length of the latus rectum for x2 = 9y Answer The given equation is x2 = 9y. Here, the coefficient of y is negative. Hence, the parabola opens downwards. On comparing this equation with x2 = 4ay, we obtain
Coordinates of the focus = Since the given equation involves x2, the axis of the parabola is the y-axis.
Question 7: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Focus (6, 0); directrix x = 6 Answer Focus (6, 0); directrix, x = 6 Since the focus lies on the x-axis, the x-axis is the axis of the parabola. Therefore, the equation of the parabola is either of the form y2 = 4ax or
Class XI y2 = 4ax.
Maths
It is also seen that the directrix, x = 6 is to the left of the y-axis, while the focus (6, 0) is to the right of the y-axis. Hence, the parabola is of the form y2 = 4ax. Here, a = 6 Thus, the equation of the parabola is y2 = 24x.
Question 8: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Focus (0, 3); directrix y = 3 Answer Focus = (0, 3); directrix y = 3 Since the focus lies on the y-axis, the y-axis is the axis of the parabola. Therefore, the equation of the parabola is either of the form x2 = 4ay or x2 = 4ay. It is also seen that the directrix, y = 3 is above the x-axis, while the focus (0, 3) is below the x-axis. Hence, the parabola is of the form x2 = 4ay. Here, a = 3 Thus, the equation of the parabola is x2 = 12y.
Question 9: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Vertex (0, 0); focus (3, 0) Answer Vertex (0, 0); focus (3, 0) Since the vertex of the parabola is (0, 0) and the focus lies on the positive x-axis, x-axis is the axis of the parabola, while the equation of the parabola is of the form y2 = 4ax. Since the focus is (3, 0), a = 3. Thus, the equation of the parabola is y2 = 4 3 x, i.e., y2 = 12x
Question 10: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Vertex (0, 0) focus (2, 0) Answer
Class XI Vertex (0, 0) focus (2, 0)
Maths
Since the vertex of the parabola is (0, 0) and the focus lies on the negative x-axis, xaxis is the axis of the parabola, while the equation of the parabola is of the form y2 = 4ax. Since the focus is (2, 0), a = 2. Thus, the equation of the parabola is y2 = 4(2)x, i.e., y2 = 8x
Question 11: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Vertex (0, 0) passing through (2, 3) and axis is along x-axis Answer Since the vertex is (0, 0) and the axis of the parabola is the x-axis, the equation of the parabola is either of the form y2 = 4ax or y2 = 4ax. The parabola passes through point (2, 3), which lies in the first quadrant. Therefore, the equation of the parabola is of the form y2 = 4ax, while point (2, 3) must satisfy the equation y2 = 4ax.
Thus, the equation of the parabola is
Question 12: Find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the following conditions: Vertex (0, 0), passing through (5, 2) and symmetric with respect to y-axis Answer Since the vertex is (0, 0) and the parabola is symmetric about the y-axis, the equation of the parabola is either of the form x2 = 4ay or x2 = 4ay. The parabola passes through point (5, 2), which lies in the first quadrant. Therefore, the equation of the parabola is of the form x2 = 4ay, while point
Class XI
Maths
(5, 2) must satisfy the equation x2 = 4ay.
Thus, the equation of the parabola is
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 11.3
Question 1: Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the minor axis,
the eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse Answer
The given equation is
Here, the denominator of
is greater than the denominator of
Therefore, the major axis is along the x-axis, while the minor axis is along the y-axis.
On comparing the given equation with
, we obtain a = 6 and b = 4.
Therefore, The coordinates of the foci are .
The coordinates of the vertices are (6, 0) and (6, 0). Length of major axis = 2a = 12 Length of minor axis = 2b = 8
Length of latus rectum
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, the major axis is along the y-axis, while the minor axis is along the x-axis.
, we obtain b = 2 and a = 5.
Therefore, The coordinates of the foci are The coordinates of the vertices are (0, 5) and (0, 5) Length of major axis = 2a = 10 Length of minor axis = 2b = 4 .
Page 17 of 49
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, The coordinates of the foci are The coordinates of the vertices are Length of major axis = 2a = 8 Length of minor axis = 2b = 6 . .
The coordinates of the vertices are (0, 10). Length of major axis = 2a = 20 Length of minor axis = 2b = 10
Class XI
Maths
The coordinates of the vertices are ( 7, 0). Length of major axis = 2a = 14 Length of minor axis = 2b = 12
Maths
Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the minor axis,
The coordinates of the vertices are (0, 20) Length of major axis = 2a = 40 Length of minor axis = 2b = 20
Question 7: Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the minor axis, the eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 36x2 + 4y2 = 144 Answer The given equation is 36x2 + 4y2 = 144. It can be written as
Class XI
Maths
On comparing equation (1) with
Question 8: Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the minor axis, the eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 16x2 + y2 = 16 Answer The given equation is 16x2 + y2 = 16. It can be written as
Class XI
Maths
On comparing equation (1) with
Question 9: Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the minor axis, the eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 4x2 + 9y2 = 36 Answer The given equation is 4x2 + 9y2 = 36. It can be written as
Class XI
Maths
Question 10: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Vertices (5, 0), foci (4, 0) Answer Vertices (5, 0), foci (4, 0) Here, the vertices are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, a = 5 and c = 4.
Page 23 of 49 Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com
, where a is the
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI It is known that .
Maths
Thus, the equation of the ellipse is
Question 11: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Vertices (0, 13), foci (0, 5) Answer Vertices (0, 13), foci (0, 5) Here, the vertices are on the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, a = 13 and c = 5. It is known that .
, where a is the
Question 12: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Vertices (6, 0), foci (4, 0) Answer Vertices (6, 0), foci (4, 0)
Class XI
Maths
Here, the vertices are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, a = 6, c = 4. It is known that .
, where a is the
Question 13: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Ends of major axis (3, 0), ends of minor axis (0, 2) Answer Ends of major axis (3, 0), ends of minor axis (0, 2) Here, the major axis is along the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, a = 3 and b = 2.
, where a is the
Question 14: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Ends of major axis , ends of minor axis (1, 0) Answer
Class XI
Maths
Ends of major axis
, ends of minor axis (1, 0)
Here, the major axis is along the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, a = and b = 1.
, where a is the
Question 15: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Length of major axis 26, foci (5, 0) Answer Length of major axis = 26; foci = (5, 0). Since the foci are on the x-axis, the major axis is along the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, 2a = 26 a = 13 and c = 5. It is known that .
, where a is the
Question 16:
Class XI
Maths
Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Length of minor axis 16, foci (0, 6) Answer Length of minor axis = 16; foci = (0, 6). Since the foci are on the y-axis, the major axis is along the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, 2b = 16 b = 8 and c = 6. It is known that .
, where a is the
Question 17: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Foci (3, 0), a = 4 Answer Foci (3, 0), a = 4 Since the foci are on the x-axis, the major axis is along the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, c = 3 and a = 4. It is known that .
, where a is the
Maths
Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: b = 3, c = 4, centre at the origin; foci on the x axis. Answer It is given that b = 3, c = 4, centre at the origin; foci on the x axis. Since the foci are on the x-axis, the major axis is along the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis. Accordingly, b = 3, c = 4. It is known that .
, where a is the
Question 19: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Centre at (0, 0), major axis on the y-axis and passes through the points (3, 2) and (1, 6). Answer Since the centre is at (0, 0) and the major axis is on the y-axis, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form
The ellipse passes through points (3, 2) and (1, 6). Hence,
On solving equations (2) and (3), we obtain b2 = 10 and a2 = 40.
Class XI
Maths
Question 20: Find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions: Major axis on the xaxis and passes through the points (4, 3) and (6, 2). Answer Since the major axis is on the x-axis, the equation of the ellipse will be of the form
The ellipse passes through points (4, 3) and (6, 2). Hence,
On solving equations (2) and (3), we obtain a2 = 52 and b2 = 13.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 11.4
Question 1: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the
latus rectum of the hyperbola Answer
On comparing this equation with the standard equation of hyperbola i.e., obtain a = 4 and b = 3. We know that a2 + b2 = c2.
, we
Therefore, The coordinates of the foci are (5, 0). The coordinates of the vertices are (4, 0).
Question 2: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the
latus rectum of the hyperbola Answer

Page 30 of 49 Website: www.vidhyarjan.com
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
On comparing this equation with the standard equation of hyperbola i.e., obtain a = 3 and .
, we
We know that a2 + b2 = c2.
Question 3: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola 9y2 4x2 = 36 Answer The given equation is 9y2 4x2 = 36. It can be written as 9y2 4x2 = 36
On comparing equation (1) with the standard equation of hyperbola i.e., obtain a = 2 and b = 3. We know that a2 + b2 = c2.
, we
Class XI Therefore, The coordinates of the foci are
Maths
. .
The coordinates of the vertices are
Question 4: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola 16x2 9y2 = 576 Answer The given equation is 16x2 9y2 = 576. It can be written as 16x2 9y2 = 576
, we
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola 5y2 9x2 = 36 Answer The given equation is 5y2 9x2 = 36.
On comparing equation (1) with the standard equation of hyperbola i.e.,
, we
obtain a =
and b = 2.
Therefore, the coordinates of the foci are
The coordinates of the vertices are
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity, and the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola 49y2 16x2 = 784 Answer The given equation is 49y2 16x2 = 784. It can be written as 49y2 16x2 = 784
, we
The coordinates of the vertices are (0, 4).
Maths
Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Vertices (2, 0), foci (3, 0) Answer Vertices (2, 0), foci (3, 0) Here, the vertices are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the vertices are (2, 0), a = 2. Since the foci are (3, 0), c = 3. We know that a2 + b2 = c2.
Thus, the equation of the hyperbola is
Question 8: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Vertices (0, 5), foci (0, 8) Answer Vertices (0, 5), foci (0, 8) Here, the vertices are on the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the vertices are (0, 5), a = 5. Since the foci are (0, 8), c = 8. We know that a2 + b2 = c2.
Class XI
Maths
Question 9: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Vertices (0, 3), foci (0, 5) Answer Vertices (0, 3), foci (0, 5) Here, the vertices are on the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the vertices are (0, 3), a = 3. Since the foci are (0, 5), c = 5. We know that a2 + b2 = c2. 32 + b2 = 52 b2 = 25 9 = 16
Question 10: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Foci (5, 0), the transverse axis is of length 8. Answer Foci (5, 0), the transverse axis is of length 8. Here, the foci are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the foci are (5, 0), c = 5. Since the length of the transverse axis is 8, 2a = 8 a = 4. We know that a2 + b2 = c2. 42 + b2 = 52 b2 = 25 16 = 9
.
Page 36 of 49
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
Question 11: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Foci (0, 13), the conjugate axis is of length 24. Answer Foci (0, 13), the conjugate axis is of length 24. Here, the foci are on the y-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the foci are (0, 13), c = 13. Since the length of the conjugate axis is 24, 2b = 24 b = 12. We know that a2 + b2 = c2. a2 + 122 = 132 a2 = 169 144 = 25
Question 12: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Foci latus rectum is of length 8. Answer Foci , the latus rectum is of length 8. , the
Here, the foci are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the foci are Length of latus rectum = 8 ,c= .
Class XI We know that a2 + b2 = c2. a2 + 4a = 45 a2 + 4a 45 = 0 a2 + 9a 5a 45 = 0 (a + 9) (a 5) = 0 a = 9, 5
Maths
Since a is non-negative, a = 5. b2 = 4a = 4 5 = 20
Question 13: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Foci (4, 0), the latus rectum is of length 12 Answer Foci (4, 0), the latus rectum is of length 12. Here, the foci are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the foci are (4, 0), c = 4. Length of latus rectum = 12
We know that a2 + b2 = c2. a2 + 6a = 16 a2 + 6a 16 = 0 a2 + 8a 2a 16 = 0 (a + 8) (a 2) = 0 a = 8, 2 Since a is non-negative, a = 2. b2 = 6a = 6 2 = 12
Class XI
Maths
Question 14: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Vertices (7, 0),
Answer
Vertices (7, 0), Here, the vertices are on the x-axis.
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the vertices are (7, 0), a = 7.
It is given that
Class XI
Maths
Question 15: Find the equation of the hyperbola satisfying the give conditions: Foci passing through (2, 3) Answer Foci , passing through (2, 3) ,
Here, the foci are on the y-axis. Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form Since the foci are
2 2 2
,c=
We know that a + b = c . a2 + b2 = 10 b2 = 10 a2 (1) Since the hyperbola passes through point (2, 3),
From equations (1) and (2), we obtain
In hyperbola, c > a, i.e., c2 > a2 a2 = 5 b2 = 10 a2 = 10 5 = 5
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: If a parabolic reflector is 20 cm in diameter and 5 cm deep, find the focus. Answer The origin of the coordinate plane is taken at the vertex of the parabolic reflector in such a way that the axis of the reflector is along the positive x-axis. This can be diagrammatically represented as
The equation of the parabola is of the form y2 = 4ax (as it is opening to the right). Since the parabola passes through point A (10, 5), 102 = 4a(5) 100 = 20a
Therefore, the focus of the parabola is (a, 0) = (5, 0), which is the mid-point of the diameter. Hence, the focus of the reflector is at the mid-point of the diameter.
Question 2: An arch is in the form of a parabola with its axis vertical. The arch is 10 m high and 5 m wide at the base. How wide is it 2 m from the vertex of the parabola? Answer
Class XI
Maths
The origin of the coordinate plane is taken at the vertex of the arch in such a way that its vertical axis is along the positive y-axis. This can be diagrammatically represented as
The equation of the parabola is of the form x2 = 4ay (as it is opening upwards).
It can be clearly seen that the parabola passes through point
Therefore, the arch is in the form of a parabola whose equation is
When y = 2 m,
Hence, when the arch is 2 m from the vertex of the parabola, its width is approximately 2.23 m.
Maths
The cable of a uniformly loaded suspension bridge hangs in the form of a parabola. The roadway which is horizontal and 100 m long is supported by vertical wires attached to the cable, the longest wire being 30 m and the shortest being 6 m. Find the length of a supporting wire attached to the roadway 18 m from the middle. Answer The vertex is at the lowest point of the cable. The origin of the coordinate plane is taken as the vertex of the parabola, while its vertical axis is taken along the positive y-axis. This can be diagrammatically represented as
Here, AB and OC are the longest and the shortest wires, respectively, attached to the cable. DF is the supporting wire attached to the roadway, 18 m from the middle.
Here, AB = 30 m, OC = 6 m, and
2
The equation of the parabola is of the form x = 4ay (as it is opening upwards). The coordinates of point A are (50, 30 6) = (50, 24). Since A (50, 24) is a point on the parabola,
Equation of the parabola, The x-coordinate of point D is 18. Hence, at x = 18,
or 6x2 = 625y
Class XI
Maths
DE = 3.11 m DF = DE + EF = 3.11 m + 6 m = 9.11 m Thus, the length of the supporting wire attached to the roadway 18 m from the middle is approximately 9.11 m.
Question 4: An arch is in the form of a semi-ellipse. It is 8 m wide and 2 m high at the centre. Find the height of the arch at a point 1.5 m from one end. Answer Since the height and width of the arc from the centre is 2 m and 8 m respectively, it is clear that the length of the major axis is 8 m, while the length of the semi-minor axis is 2 m. The origin of the coordinate plane is taken as the centre of the ellipse, while the major axis is taken along the x-axis. Hence, the semi-ellipse can be diagrammatically represented as
The equation of the semi-ellipse will be of the form semi-major axis Accordingly, 2a = 8 a = 4
, where a is the
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI b=2
Maths
Therefore, the equation of the semi-ellipse is Let A be a point on the major axis such that AB = 1.5 m. Draw AC OB. OA = (4 1.5) m = 2.5 m The x-coordinate of point C is 2.5. On substituting the value of x with 2.5 in equation (1), we obtain
AC = 1.56 m Thus, the height of the arch at a point 1.5 m from one end is approximately 1.56 m.
Question 5: A rod of length 12 cm moves with its ends always touching the coordinate axes. Determine the equation of the locus of a point P on the rod, which is 3 cm from the end in contact with the x-axis. Answer Let AB be the rod making an angle with OX and P (x, y) be the point on it such that AP = 3 cm. Then, PB = AB AP = (12 3) cm = 9 cm [AB = 12 cm] From P, draw PQOY and PROX.
Class XI
Maths
In PBQ,
In PRA,
Thus, the equation of the locus of point P on the rod is
Question 6: Find the area of the triangle formed by the lines joining the vertex of the parabola x2 = 12y to the ends of its latus rectum. Answer The given parabola is x2 = 12y. On comparing this equation with x2 = 4ay, we obtain 4a = 12 a = 3 The coordinates of foci are S (0, a) = S (0, 3) Let AB be the latus rectum of the given parabola. The given parabola can be roughly drawn as
Class XI
Maths
At y = 3, x2 = 12 (3) x2 = 36 x = 6 The coordinates of A are (6, 3), while the coordinates of B are (6, 3). Therefore, the vertices of OAB are O (0, 0), A (6, 3), and B (6, 3).
Thus, the required area of the triangle is 18 unit2.
Question 7: A man running a racecourse notes that the sum of the distances from the two flag posts form him is always 10 m and the distance between the flag posts is 8 m. find the equation of the posts traced by the man. Answer Let A and B be the positions of the two flag posts and P(x, y) be the position of the man. Accordingly, PA + PB = 10.
Class XI
Maths
We know that if a point moves in a plane in such a way that the sum of its distances from two fixed points is constant, then the path is an ellipse and this constant value is equal to the length of the major axis of the ellipse. Therefore, the path described by the man is an ellipse where the length of the major axis is 10 m, while points A and B are the foci. Taking the origin of the coordinate plane as the centre of the ellipse, while taking the major axis along the x-axis, the ellipse can be diagrammatically represented as
The equation of the ellipse will be of the form axis Accordingly, 2a = 10 a = 5 Distance between the foci (2c) = 8 c=4 On using the relation , we obtain
, where a is the semi-major
Thus, the equation of the path traced by the man is
Question 8:
Class XI
Maths
An equilateral triangle is inscribed in the parabola y2 = 4 ax, where one vertex is at the vertex of the parabola. Find the length of the side of the triangle. Answer Let OAB be the equilateral triangle inscribed in parabola y2 = 4ax. Let AB intersect the x-axis at point C.
Let OC = k From the equation of the given parabola, we have The respective coordinates of points A and B are AB = CA + CB = Since OAB is an equilateral triangle, OA2 = AB2.
Thus, the side of the equilateral triangle inscribed in parabola y2 = 4 ax is
Class XI
Chapter 12 Introduction to Three Dimensional Geometry
Maths
Exercise 12.1
Question 1: A point is on the x-axis. What are its y-coordinates and z-coordinates? Answer If a point is on the x-axis, then its y-coordinates and z-coordinates are zero.
Question 2: A point is in the XZ-plane. What can you say about its y-coordinate? Answer If a point is in the XZ plane, then its y-coordinate is zero.
Question 3: Name the octants in which the following points lie: (1, 2, 3), (4, 2, 3), (4, 2, 5), (4, 2, 5), (4, 2, 5), (4, 2, 5), (3, 1, 6), (2, 4, 7) Answer The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (1, 2, 3) are all positive. Therefore, this point lies in octant I. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (4, 2, 3) are positive, negative, and positive respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant IV. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (4, 2, 5) are positive, negative, and negative respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant VIII. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (4, 2, 5) are positive, positive, and negative respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant V. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (4, 2, 5) are negative, positive, and negative respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant VI. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (4, 2, 5) are negative, positive, and positive respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant II. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (3, 1, 6) are negative, negative, and positive respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant III. The x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and z-coordinate of point (2, 4, 7) are positive, negative, and negative respectively. Therefore, this point lies in octant VIII.
Maths
Fill in the blanks: Answer (i) The x-axis and y-axis taken together determine a plane known as (ii) The coordinates of points in the XY-plane are of the form (iii) Coordinate planes divide the space into octants. . .
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 12.2
Question 1: Find the distance between the following pairs of points: (i) (2, 3, 5) and (4, 3, 1) (ii) (3, 7, 2) and (2, 4, 1) (iii) (1, 3, 4) and (1, 3, 4) (iv) (2, 1, 3) and (2, 1, 3) Answer The distance between points P(x1, y1, z1) and P(x2, y2, z2) is given by
(i) Distance between points (2, 3, 5) and (4, 3, 1)
(ii) Distance between points (3, 7, 2) and (2, 4, 1)
(iii) Distance between points (1, 3, 4) and (1, 3, 4)
(iv) Distance between points (2, 1, 3) and (2, 1, 3)
Class XI
Maths
Question 2: Show that the points (2, 3, 5), (1, 2, 3) and (7, 0, 1) are collinear. Answer Let points (2, 3, 5), (1, 2, 3), and (7, 0, 1) be denoted by P, Q, and R respectively. Points P, Q, and R are collinear if they lie on a line.
Class XI Here, PQ + QR
Chapter 12 Introduction to Three Dimensional Geometry = PR
Maths
Hence, points P(2, 3, 5), Q(1, 2, 3), and R(7, 0, 1) are collinear.
Question 3: Verify the following: (i) (0, 7, 10), (1, 6, 6) and (4, 9, 6) are the vertices of an isosceles triangle. (ii) (0, 7, 10), (1, 6, 6) and (4, 9, 6) are the vertices of a right angled triangle. (iii) (1, 2, 1), (1, 2, 5), (4, 7, 8) and (2, 3, 4) are the vertices of a parallelogram. Answer (i) Let points (0, 7, 10), (1, 6, 6), and (4, 9, 6) be denoted by A, B, and C respectively.
Here, AB = BC CA Thus, the given points are the vertices of an isosceles triangle. (ii) Let (0, 7, 10), (1, 6, 6), and (4, 9, 6) be denoted by A, B, and C respectively.
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, by Pythagoras theorem, ABC is a right triangle. Hence, the given points are the vertices of a right-angled triangle. (iii) Let (1, 2, 1), (1, 2, 5), (4, 7, 8), and (2, 3, 4) be denoted by A, B, C, and D respectively.
Class XI
Maths
Here, AB = CD = 6, BC = AD = Hence, the opposite sides of quadrilateral ABCD, whose vertices are taken in order, are equal. Therefore, ABCD is a parallelogram. Hence, the given points are the vertices of a parallelogram.
Question 4: Find the equation of the set of points which are equidistant from the points (1, 2, 3) and (3, 2, 1). Answer Let P (x, y, z) be the point that is equidistant from points A(1, 2, 3) and B(3, 2, 1). Accordingly, PA = PB
x2 2x + 1 + y2 4y + 4 + z2 6z + 9 = x2 6x + 9 + y2 4y + 4 + z2 + 2z + 1
Class XI
Maths
2x 4y 6z + 14 = 6x 4y + 2z + 14 2x 6z + 6x 2z = 0 4x 8z = 0 x 2z = 0 Thus, the required equation is x 2z = 0.
Question 5: Find the equation of the set of points P, the sum of whose distances from A (4, 0, 0) and B (4, 0, 0) is equal to 10. Answer Let the coordinates of P be (x, y, z). The coordinates of points A and B are (4, 0, 0) and (4, 0, 0) respectively. It is given that PA + PB = 10.
On squaring both sides, we obtain
On squaring both sides again, we obtain 25 (x2 + 8x + 16 + y2 + z2) = 625 + 16x2 + 200x 25x2 + 200x + 400 + 25y2 + 25z2 = 625 + 16x2 + 200x 9x2 + 25y2 + 25z2 225 = 0 Thus, the required equation is 9x2 + 25y2 + 25z2 225 = 0.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 12.3
Question 1: Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining the points (2, 3, 5) and (1, 4, 6) in the ratio (i) 2:3 internally, (ii) 2:3 externally. Answer (i) The coordinates of point R that divides the line segment joining points P (x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) internally in the ratio m: n are
. Let R (x, y, z) be the point that divides the line segment joining points(2, 3, 5) and (1, 4, 6) internally in the ratio 2:3
Thus, the coordinates of the required point are
(ii) The coordinates of point R that divides the line segment joining points P (x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) externally in the ratio m: n are
. Let R (x, y, z) be the point that divides the line segment joining points(2, 3, 5) and (1, 4, 6) externally in the ratio 2:3
Thus, the coordinates of the required point are (8, 17, 3).
Question 2:
Class XI
Maths
Given that P (3, 2, 4), Q (5, 4, 6) and R (9, 8, 10) are collinear. Find the ratio in which Q divides PR. Answer Let point Q (5, 4, 6) divide the line segment joining points P (3, 2, 4) and R (9, 8, 10) in the ratio k:1. Therefore, by section formula,
Thus, point Q divides PR in the ratio 1:2.
Question 3: Find the ratio in which the YZ-plane divides the line segment formed by joining the points (2, 4, 7) and (3, 5, 8). Answer Let the YZ planedivide the line segment joining points (2, 4, 7) and (3, 5, 8) in the ratio k:1. Hence, by section formula, the coordinates of point of intersection are given by
On the YZ plane, the x-coordinate of any point is zero.
Thus, the YZ plane divides the line segment formed by joining the given points in the ratio 2:3.
Class XI
Maths
Question 4:
Using section formula, show that the points A (2, 3, 4), B (1, 2, 1) and collinear. Answer
are
The given points are A (2, 3, 4), B (1, 2, 1), and Let P be a point that divides AB in the ratio k:1. Hence, by section formula, the coordinates of P are given by
Now, we find the value of k at which point P coincides with point C.
By taking
, we obtain k = 2.
For k = 2, the coordinates of point P are
i.e., point P.
is a point that divides AB externally in the ratio 2:1 and is the same as
Hence, points A, B, and C are collinear.
Question 5: Find the coordinates of the points which trisect the line segment joining the points P (4, 2, 6) and Q (10, 16, 6). Answer Let A and B be the points that trisect the line segment joining points P (4, 2, 6) and Q (10, 16, 6)
Class XI
Maths
Point A divides PQ in the ratio 1:2. Therefore, by section formula, the coordinates of point A are given by
Point B divides PQ in the ratio 2:1. Therefore, by section formula, the coordinates of point B are given by
Thus, (6, 4, 2) and (8, 10, 2) are the points that trisect the line segment joining points P (4, 2, 6) and Q (10, 16, 6).
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: Three vertices of a parallelogram ABCD are A (3, 1, 2), B (1, 2, 4) andC (1, 1, 2). Find the coordinates of the fourth vertex. Answer The three vertices of a parallelogram ABCD are given as A (3, 1, 2), B (1, 2, 4), and C (1, 1, 2). Let the coordinates of the fourth vertex be D (x, y, z).
We know that the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other. Therefore, in parallelogram ABCD, AC and BD bisect each other. Mid-point of AC = Mid-point of BD
x = 1, y = 2, and z = 8 Thus, the coordinates of the fourth vertex are (1, 2, 8).
Question 2: Find the lengths of the medians of the triangle with vertices A (0, 0, 6), B (0, 4, 0) and (6, 0, 0).
Class XI Answer
Maths
Let AD, BE, and CF be the medians of the given triangle ABC.
Since AD is the median, D is the mid-point of BC.
Coordinates of point D =
= (3, 2, 0)
Thus, the lengths of the medians of ABC are
Question 3: If the origin is the centroid of the triangle PQR with vertices P (2a, 2, 6), Q (4, 3b, 10) and R (8, 14, 2c), then find the values of a, b and c. Answer
Class XI
Maths
It is known that the coordinates of the centroid of the triangle, whose vertices are (x1,
y1, z1), (x2, y2, z2) and (x3, y3, z3), are Therefore, coordinates of the centroid of PQR
It is given that origin is the centroid of PQR.
Thus, the respective values of a, b, and c are
Question 4: Find the coordinates of a point on y-axis which are at a distance of (3, 2, 5). Answer If a point is on the y-axis, then x-coordinate and the z-coordinate of the point are zero. Let A (0, b, 0) be the point on the y-axis at a distance of Accordingly, from point P (3, 2, 5). from the point P
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the coordinates of the required points are (0, 2, 0) and (0, 6, 0).
Question 5: A point R with x-coordinate 4 lies on the line segment joining the pointsP (2, 3, 4) and Q (8, 0, 10). Find the coordinates of the point R. [Hint suppose R divides PQ in the ratio k: 1. The coordinates of the point R are given by
Answer The coordinates of points P and Q are given as P (2, 3, 4) and Q (8, 0, 10). Let R divide line segment PQ in the ratio k:1. Hence, by section formula, the coordinates of point R are given by
It is given that the x-coordinate of point R is 4.
Therefore, the coordinates of point R are

Class XI
Maths
Question 6: If A and B be the points (3, 4, 5) and (1, 3, 7), respectively, find the equation of the set of points P such that PA2 + PB2 = k2, where k is a constant. Answer The coordinates of points A and B are given as (3, 4, 5) and (1, 3, 7) respectively. Let the coordinates of point P be (x, y, z). On using distance formula, we obtain
Now, if PA2 + PB2 = k2, then
Thus, the required equation is
Class XI
Chapter 13 Limits and Derivatives
Maths
Exercise 13.1
Question 1: Evaluate the Given limit: Answer
Question 2:
Evaluate the Given limit: Answer
Question 3: Evaluate the Given limit: Answer
Question 4:
Question 5:
Class XI
Maths
Question 6:
Put x + 1 = y so that y 1 as x 0.
Question 7:
At x = 2, the value of the given rational function takes the form
Class XI
Maths
Question 8:
At x = 2, the value of the given rational function takes the form
Question 9:
Class XI
Maths
Question 10:
At z = 1, the value of the given function takes the form Put so that z 1 as x 1.
Question 11:
Class XI
Maths
Question 12:
At x = 2, the value of the given function takes the form
Question 13:
Class XI
Maths
Question 14:
Maths
It is seen that x ( x) 0
Question 16:
Evaluate the given limit:
Answer
Question 17:
Evaluate the Given limit:
Answer
Class XI
Maths
At x = 0, the value of the given function takes the form Now,
Question 18:
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 19: Evaluate the Given limit:
Answer
Question 20:
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Question 21: Evaluate the Given limit:
Answer At x = 0, the value of the given function takes the form Now, .
Class XI
Maths
Question 22:
Answer
At
, the value of the given function takes the form
Now, put
so that
Class XI
Maths
Question 23:
Find Answer
f(x) and
f(x), where f(x) =
f(x) =
Class XI
Maths
Question 24:
Find Answer
f(x), where f(x) =
Question 25:
Evaluate Answer
f(x), where f(x) =
f(x) =
Class XI
Maths
Question 26:
Find Answer
f(x), where f(x) =
Class XI
Maths
Question 27: Find Answer The given function is f(x) = . f(x), where f(x) =
Class XI
Maths
Question 28:
Suppose f(x) = Answer The given function is
and if
f(x) = f(1) what are possible values of a and b?
Thus, the respective possible values of a and b are 0 and 4.

Class XI
Maths
Question 29: Let be fixed real numbers and define a function
What is Answer
f(x)? For some
compute
f(x).
Question 30:
If f(x) =
. f(x) exists?
For what value (s) of a does Answer The given function is
Class XI
Maths
When a < 0,
When a > 0
Class XI
Maths
Thus,
exists for all a 0.
Question 31:
If the function f(x) satisfies Answer
, evaluate
Maths
If exist? Answer The given function is
. For what integers m and n does
and
Thus,
exists if m = n.
Thus,
exists for any integral value of m and n.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 13.2
Question 1: Find the derivative of x2 2 at x = 10. Answer Let f(x) = x2 2. Accordingly,
Thus, the derivative of x2 2 at x = 10 is 20.
Question 2: Find the derivative of 99x at x = 100. Answer Let f(x) = 99x. Accordingly,
Thus, the derivative of 99x at x = 100 is 99.
Question 3: Find the derivative of x at x = 1.

Class XI Answer Let f(x) = x. Accordingly,
Maths
Thus, the derivative of x at x = 1 is 1.
Question 4: Find the derivative of the following functions from first principle. (i) x3 27 (ii) (x 1) (x 2)
(ii) Answer
(iv)
(i) Let f(x) = x3 27. Accordingly, from the first principle,
(ii) Let f(x) = (x 1) (x 2). Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(iii) Let
. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(iv) Let
. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Question 5: For the function
Prove that Answer The given function is
Class XI
Maths
Thus,
Question 6: Find the derivative of Answer Let for some fixed real number a.
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: For some constants a and b, find the derivative of
(i) (x a) (x b) (ii) (ax2 + b)2 (iii) Answer (i) Let f (x) = (x a) (x b)
(ii) Let
(iii)
By quotient rule,
Class XI
Maths
Question 8:
Find the derivative of Answer
for some constant a.
By quotient rule,
Question 9: Find the derivative of
(i)
(ii) (5x3 + 3x 1) (x 1)
Class XI
Maths
(iii) x3 (5 + 3x) (iv) x5 (3 6x9)
(v) x4 (3 4x5) (vi) Answer
(i) Let
(ii) Let f (x) = (5x3 + 3x 1) (x 1) By Leibnitz product rule,
(iii) Let f (x) = x 3 (5 + 3x) By Leibnitz product rule,
Class XI
Maths
(iv) Let f (x) = x5 (3 6x9) By Leibnitz product rule,
(v) Let f (x) = x4 (3 4x5) By Leibnitz product rule,
Class XI
Maths
(vi) Let f (x) =
By quotient rule,
Question 10: Find the derivative of cos x from first principle. Answer Let f (x) = cos x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Question 11: Find the derivative of the following functions: (i) sin x cos x (ii) sec x (iii) 5 sec x + 4 cos x (iv) cosec x (v) 3cot x + 5cosec x (vi) 5sin x 6cos x + 7 (vii) 2tan x 7sec x Answer (i) Let f (x) = sin x cos x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(ii) Let f (x) = sec x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(iii) Let f (x) = 5 sec x + 4 cos x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(iv) Let f (x) = cosec x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(v) Let f (x) = 3cot x + 5cosec x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
(vi) Let f (x) = 5sin x 6cos x + 7. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
(vii) Let f (x) = 2 tan x 7 sec x. Accordingly, from the first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: Find the derivative of the following functions from first principle: (i) x (ii) (x)1 (iii) sin (x + 1)
(iv) Answer (i) Let f(x) = x. Accordingly, By first principle,
(ii) Let By first principle,
. Accordingly,
Class XI
Maths
(iii) Let f(x) = sin (x + 1). Accordingly, By first principle,
(iv) Let By first principle,
. Accordingly,
Class XI
Maths
Question 2: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (x + a) Answer Let f(x) = x + a. Accordingly, By first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r
and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): Answer
By Leibnitz product rule,
Maths
Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (ax + b) (cx + d)2 Answer Let By Leibnitz product rule,
Let By quotient rule,
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers):
Answer
By quotient rule,
Maths
Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r
By quotient rule,
Class XI
Maths
By quotient rule,
Maths
Question 11: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): Answer
Question 12: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (ax + b)n Answer
Class XI
Maths
By first principle,
Question 13: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (ax + b)n (cx + d)m Answer Let
Class XI By Leibnitz product rule,
Maths
Therefore, from (1), (2), and (3), we obtain
Maths
Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): sin (x + a) Answer Let
By first principle,
Question 15: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): cosec x cot x Answer Let
Class XI By Leibnitz product rule,
Maths
By first principle,
Now, let f2(x) = cosec x. Accordingly, By first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Maths

Class XI
Maths
Let
By quotient rule,
Class XI
Maths
Question 19: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): sinn x Answer Let y = sinn x. Accordingly, for n = 1, y = sin x.
For n = 2, y = sin2 x.
Class XI
Maths
For n = 3, y = sin3 x.
We assert that Let our assertion be true for n = k.
i.e.,
Thus, our assertion is true for n = k + 1.
Hence, by mathematical induction,
Question 20:
Class XI
Maths
By quotient rule,
Class XI
Maths
By first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Question 22: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): x4 (5 sin x 3 cos x) Answer Let By product rule,
Question 23: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (x2 + 1) cos x Answer Let By product rule,
Question 24: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (ax2 + sin x) (p + q cos x) Answer Let
Class XI By product rule,
Maths
Question 25: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): Answer Let By product rule,
Let
. Accordingly,
By first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Therefore, from (i) and (ii), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Question 27: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers):
Answer
Class XI
Maths
Let
By first principle,
Class XI
Maths
Question 29: Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d, p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers): (x + sec x) (x tan x) Answer Let By product rule,
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
From (i), (ii), and (iii), we obtain

Class XI
Maths
It can be easily shown that Therefore,
Class XI
Chapter 14 Mathematical Reasoning
Maths
Exercise 14.1
Question 1: Which of the following sentences are statements? Give reasons for your answer. (i) There are 35 days in a month. (ii) Mathematics is difficult. (iii) The sum of 5 and 7 is greater than 10. (iv) The square of a number is an even number. (v) The sides of a quadrilateral have equal length. (vi) Answer this question. (vii) The product of (1) and 8 is 8. (viii) The sum of all interior angles of a triangle is 180. (ix) Today is a windy day. (x) All real numbers are complex numbers. Answer (i) This sentence is incorrect because the maximum number of days in a month is 31. Hence, it is a statement. (ii) This sentence is subjective in the sense that for some people, mathematics can be easy and for some others, it can be difficult. Hence, it is not a statement. (iii) The sum of 5 and 7 is 12, which is greater than 10. Therefore, this sentence is always correct. Hence, it is a statement. (iv) This sentence is sometimes correct and sometimes incorrect. For example, the square of 2 is an even number. However, the square of 3 is an odd number. Hence, it is not a statement. (v) This sentence is sometimes correct and sometimes incorrect. For example, squares and rhombus have sides of equal lengths. However, trapezium and rectangles have sides of unequal lengths. Hence, it is not a statement. (vi) It is an order. Therefore, it is not a statement. (vii) The product of (1) and 8 is (8). Therefore, the given sentence is incorrect. Hence, it is a statement. (viii) This sentence is correct and hence, it is a statement. (ix) The day that is being referred to is not evident from the sentence. Hence, it is not a statement.
Class XI
Maths
(x) All real numbers can be written as a 1 + 0 i. Therefore, the given sentence is always correct. Hence, it is a statement.
Question 2: Give three examples of sentences which are not statements. Give reasons for the answers. Answer The three examples of sentences, which are not statements, are as follows. (i) He is a doctor. It is not evident from the sentence as to whom he is referred to. Therefore, it is not a statement. (ii) Geometry is difficult. This is not a statement because for some people, geometry can be easy and for some others, it can be difficult. (iii) Where is she going? This is a question, which also contains she, and it is not evident as to who she is. Hence, it is not a statement.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 14.2
Question 1: Write the negation of the following statements: (i) Chennai is the capital of Tamil Nadu. (ii) is not a complex number.
(iii) All triangles are not equilateral triangle. (iv) The number 2 is greater than 7. (v) Every natural number is an integer. Answer (i) Chennai is not the capital of Tamil Nadu. (ii) is a complex number.
(iii) All triangles are equilateral triangles. (iv) The number 2 is not greater than 7. (v) Every natural number is not an integer.
Question 2: Are the following pairs of statements negations of each other? (i) The number x is not a rational number. The number x is not an irrational number. (ii) The number x is a rational number. The number x is an irrational number. Answer (i) The negation of the first statement is the number x is a rational number. This is same as the second statement. This is because if a number is not an irrational number, then it is a rational number. Therefore, the given statements are negations of each other. (ii) The negation of the first statement is the number x is not a rational number. This means that the number x is an irrational number, which is the same as the second statement. Therefore, the given statements are negations of each other.
Maths
Find the component statements of the following compound statements and check whether they are true or false. (i) Number 3 is prime or it is odd. (ii) All integers are positive or negative. (iii) 100 is divisible by 3, 11 and 5. Answer (i) The component statements are as follows. p: Number 3 is prime. q: Number 3 is odd. Both the statements are true. (ii) The component statements are as follows. p: All integers are positive. q: All integers are negative. Both the statements are false. (iii) The component statements are as follows. p: 100 is divisible by 3. q: 100 is divisible by 11. r: 100 is divisible by 5. Here, the statements, p and q, are false and statement r is true.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 14.3
Question 1: For each of the following compound statements first identify the connecting words and then break it into component statements. (i) All rational numbers are real and all real numbers are not complex. (ii) Square of an integer is positive or negative. (iii) The sand heats up quickly in the Sun and does not cool down fast at night. (iv) x = 2 and x = 3 are the roots of the equation 3x2 x 10 = 0. Answer (i) Here, the connecting word is and. The component statements are as follows. p: All rational numbers are real. q: All real numbers are not complex. (ii) Here, the connecting word is or. The component statements are as follows. p: Square of an integer is positive. q: Square of an integer is negative. (iii) Here, the connecting word is and. The component statements are as follows. p: The sand heats up quickly in the sun. q: The sand does not cool down fast at night. (iv) Here, the connecting word is and. The component statements are as follows. p: x = 2 is a root of the equation 3x2 x 10 = 0 q: x = 3 is a root of the equation 3x2 x 10 = 0
Question 2: Identify the quantifier in the following statements and write the negation of the statements. (i) There exists a number which is equal to its square. (ii) For every real number x, x is less than x + 1. (iii) There exists a capital for every state in India. Answer
Class XI
Maths
(i) The quantifier is There exists. The negation of this statement is as follows. There does not exist a number which is equal to its square. (ii) The quantifier is For every. The negation of this statement is as follows. There exist a real number x such that x is not less than x + 1. (iii) The quantifier is There exists. The negation of this statement is as follows. There exists a state in India which does not have a capital.
Question 3: Check whether the following pair of statements is negation of each other. Give reasons for the answer. (i) x + y = y + x is true for every real numbers x and y. (ii) There exists real number x and y for which x + y = y + x. Answer The negation of statement (i) is as follows. There exists real number x and y for which x + y y + x. This is not the same as statement (ii). Thus, the given statements are not the negation of each other.
Question 4: State whether the Or used in the following statements is exclusive or inclusive. Give reasons for your answer. (i) Sun rises or Moon sets. (ii) To apply for a driving licence, you should have a ration card or a passport. (iii) All integers are positive or negative. Answer (i) Here, or is exclusive because it is not possible for the Sun to rise and the moon to set together. (ii) Here, or is inclusive since a person can have both a ration card and a passport to apply for a driving licence. (iii) Here, or is exclusive because all integers cannot be both positive and negative.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 14.4
Question 1: Rewrite the following statement with if-then in five different ways conveying the same meaning. If a natural number is odd, then its square is also odd. Answer The given statement can be written in five different ways as follows. (i) A natural number is odd implies that its square is odd. (ii) A natural number is odd only if its square is odd. (iii) For a natural number to be odd, it is necessary that its square is odd. (iv) For the square of a natural number to be odd, it is sufficient that the number is odd. (v) If the square of a natural number is not odd, then the natural number is not odd.
Question 2: Write the contrapositive and converse of the following statements. (i) If x is a prime number, then x is odd. (ii) It the two lines are parallel, then they do not intersect in the same plane. (iii) Something is cold implies that it has low temperature. (iv) You cannot comprehend geometry if you do not know how to reason deductively. (v) x is an even number implies that x is divisible by 4 Answer (i) The contrapositive is as follows. If a number x is not odd, then x is not a prime number. The converse is as follows. If a number x is odd, then it is a prime number. (ii) The contrapositive is as follows. If two lines intersect in the same plane, then they are not parallel. The converse is as follows. If two lines do not intersect in the same plane, then they are parallel. (iii) The contrapositive is as follows. If something does not have low temperature, then it is not cold. The converse is as follows. If something is at low temperature, then it is cold.
Class XI
Maths
(iv) The contrapositive is as follows. If you know how to reason deductively, then you can comprehend geometry. The converse is as follows. If you do not know how to reason deductively, then you cannot comprehend geometry. (v) The given statement can be written as follows. If x is an even number, then x is divisible by 4. The contrapositive is as follows. If x is not divisible by 4, then x is not an even number. The converse is as follows. If x is divisible by 4, then x is an even number.
Question 3: Write each of the following statement in the form if-then. (i) You get a job implies that your credentials are good. (ii) The Banana trees will bloom if it stays warm for a month. (iii) A quadrilateral is a parallelogram if its diagonals bisect each other. (iv) To get A+ in the class, it is necessary that you do the exercises of the book. Answer (i) If you get a job, then your credentials are good. (ii) If the Banana tree stays warm for a month, then it will bloom. (iii) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then it is a parallelogram. (iv) If you want to get an A+ in the class, then you do all the exercises of the book.
Question 4: Given statements in (a) and (b). Identify the statements given below as contrapositive or converse of each other. (a) If you live in Delhi, then you have winter clothes. (i) If you do not have winter clothes, then you do not live in Delhi. (ii) If you have winter clothes, then you live in Delhi. (b) If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other. (i) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral do not bisect each other, then the quadrilateral is not a parallelogram. (ii) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then it is a parallelogram.
Class XI Answer
Maths
(a) (i) This is the contrapositive of the given statement (a). (ii) This is the converse of the given statement (a). (b) (i) This is the contrapositive of the given statement (b). (ii) This is the converse of the given statement (b).
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 14.5
Question 1: Show that the statement p: If x is a real number such that x3 + 4x = 0, then x is 0 is true by (i) direct method (ii) method of contradiction (iii) method of contrapositive Answer p: If x is a real number such that x3 + 4x = 0, then x is 0. Let q: x is a real number such that x3 + 4x = 0 r: x is 0. (i) To show that statement p is true, we assume that q is true and then show that r is true. Therefore, let statement q be true. x3 + 4x = 0 x (x2 + 4) = 0 x = 0 or x2 + 4 = 0 However, since x is real, it is 0. Thus, statement r is true. Therefore, the given statement is true. (ii) To show statement p to be true by contradiction, we assume that p is not true. Let x be a real number such that x3 + 4x = 0 and let x is not 0. Therefore, x3 + 4x = 0 x (x2 + 4) = 0 x = 0 or x2 + 4 = 0 x = 0 or x2 = 4 However, x is real. Therefore, x = 0, which is a contradiction since we have assumed that x is not 0. Thus, the given statement p is true. (iii) To prove statement p to be true by contrapositive method, we assume that r is false and prove that q must be false. Here, r is false implies that it is required to consider the negation of statement r. This obtains the following statement.
Class XI r: x is not 0.
Maths
It can be seen that (x2 + 4) will always be positive. x 0 implies that the product of any positive real number with x is not zero. Let us consider the product of x with (x2 + 4). x (x2 + 4) 0 x3 + 4x 0 This shows that statement q is not true. Thus, it has been proved that r q Therefore, the given statement p is true.
Question 2: Show that the statement For any real numbers a and b, a2 = b2 implies that a = b is not true by giving a counter-example. Answer The given statement can be written in the form of if-then as follows. If a and b are real numbers such that a2 = b2, then a = b. Let p: a and b are real numbers such that a2 = b2. q: a = b The given statement has to be proved false. For this purpose, it has to be proved that if p, then q. To show this, two real numbers, a and b, with a2 = b2 are required such that a b. Let a = 1 and b = 1 a2 = (1)2 = 1 and b2 = ( 1)2 = 1 a2 = b 2 However, a b Thus, it can be concluded that the given statement is false.
Question 3: Show that the following statement is true by the method of contrapositive. p: If x is an integer and x2 is even, then x is also even. Answer p: If x is an integer and x2 is even, then x is also even.
Class XI
Maths
Let q: x is an integer and x2 is even. r: x is even. To prove that p is true by contrapositive method, we assume that r is false, and prove that q is also false. Let x is not even. To prove that q is false, it has to be proved that x is not an integer or x2 is not even. x is not even implies that x2 is also not even. Therefore, statement q is false. Thus, the given statement p is true.
Question 4: By giving a counter example, show that the following statements are not true. (i) p: If all the angles of a triangle are equal, then the triangle is an obtuse angled triangle. (ii) q: The equation x2 1 = 0 does not have a root lying between 0 and 2. Answer (i) The given statement is of the form if q then r. q: All the angles of a triangle are equal. r: The triangle is an obtuse-angled triangle. The given statement p has to be proved false. For this purpose, it has to be proved that if q, then r. To show this, angles of a triangle are required such that none of them is an obtuse angle. It is known that the sum of all angles of a triangle is 180. Therefore, if all the three angles are equal, then each of them is of measure 60, which is not an obtuse angle. In an equilateral triangle, the measure of all angles is equal. However, the triangle is not an obtuse-angled triangle. Thus, it can be concluded that the given statement p is false. (ii) The given statement is as follows. q: The equation x2 1 = 0 does not have a root lying between 0 and 2. This statement has to be proved false. To show this, a counter example is required. Consider x2 1 = 0 x2 = 1
Class XI x=1
Maths
One root of the equation x2 1 = 0, i.e. the root x = 1, lies between 0 and 2. Thus, the given statement is false.
Question 5: Which of the following statements are true and which are false? In each case give a valid reason for saying so. (i) p: Each radius of a circle is a chord of the circle. (ii) q: The centre of a circle bisects each chord of the circle. (iii) r: Circle is a particular case of an ellipse. (iv) s: If x and y are integers such that x > y, then x < y. (v) t: Answer (i) The given statement p is false. According to the definition of chord, it should intersect the circle at two distinct points. (ii) The given statement q is false. If the chord is not the diameter of the circle, then the centre will not bisect that chord. In other words, the centre of a circle only bisects the diameter, which is the chord of the circle. (iii) The equation of an ellipse is, is a rational number.
If we put a = b = 1, then we obtain x2 + y2 = 1, which is an equation of a circle Therefore, circle is a particular case of an ellipse. Thus, statement r is true. (iv) x > y x < y (By a rule of inequality) Thus, the given statement s is true. (v) 11 is a prime number and we know that the square root of any prime number is an irrational number. Therefore, is an irrational number.
Thus, the given statement t is false.

Class XI
Maths

Question 1: Write the negation of the following statements: (i) p: For every positive real number x, the number x 1 is also positive. (ii) q: All cats scratch. (iii) r: For every real number x, either x > 1 or x < 1. (iv) s: There exists a number x such that 0 < x < 1. Answer (i) The negation of statement p is as follows. There exists a positive real number x, such that x 1 is not positive. (ii) The negation of statement q is as follows. There exists a cat that does not scratch. (iii) The negation of statement r is as follows. There exists a real number x, such that neither x > 1 nor x < 1. (iv) The negation of statement s is as follows. There does not exist a number x, such that 0 < x < 1.
Question 2: State the converse and contrapositive of each of the following statements: (i) p: A positive integer is prime only if it has no divisors other than 1 and itself. (ii) q: I go to a beach whenever it is a sunny day. (iii) r: If it is hot outside, then you feel thirsty. Answer (i) Statement p can be written as follows. If a positive integer is prime, then it has no divisors other than 1 and itself. The converse of the statement is as follows. If a positive integer has no divisors other than 1 and itself, then it is prime. The contrapositive of the statement is as follows. If positive integer has divisors other than 1 and itself, then it is not prime. (ii) The given statement can be written as follows. If it is a sunny day, then I go to a beach. The converse of the statement is as follows.
Class XI
Maths
If I go to a beach, then it is a sunny day. The contrapositive of the statement is as follows. If I do not go to a beach, then it is not a sunny day. (iii) The converse of statement r is as follows. If you feel thirsty, then it is hot outside. The contrapositive of statement r is as follows. If you do not feel thirsty, then it is not hot outside.
Question 3: Write each of the statements in the form if p, then q. (i) p: It is necessary to have a password to log on to the server. (ii) q: There is traffic jam whenever it rains. (iii) r: You can access the website only if you pay a subscription fee. Answer (i) Statement p can be written as follows. If you log on to the server, then you have a password. (ii) Statement q can be written as follows. If it rains, then there is a traffic jam. (iii) Statement r can be written as follows. If you can access the website, then you pay a subscription fee.
Question 4: Re write each of the following statements in the form p if and only if q. (i) p: If you watch television, then your mind is free and if your mind is free, then you watch television. (ii) q: For you to get an A grade, it is necessary and sufficient that you do all the homework regularly. (iii) r: If a quadrilateral is equiangular, then it is a rectangle and if a quadrilateral is a rectangle, then it is equiangular. Answer (i) You watch television if and only if your mind is free. (ii) You get an A grade if and only if you do all the homework regularly. (iii) A quadrilateral is equiangular if and only if it is a rectangle.
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Given below are two statements p: 25 is a multiple of 5. q: 25 is a multiple of 8. Write the compound statements connecting these two statements with And and Or. In both cases check the validity of the compound statement. Answer The compound statement with And is 25 is a multiple of 5 and 8. This is a false statement, since 25 is not a multiple of 8. The compound statement with Or is 25 is a multiple of 5 or 8. This is a true statement, since 25 is not a multiple of 8 but it is a multiple of 5.
Question 6: Check the validity of the statements given below by the method given against it. (i) p: The sum of an irrational number and a rational number is irrational (by contradiction method). (ii) q: If n is a real number with n > 3, then n2 > 9 (by contradiction method). Answer (i) The given statement is as follows. p: the sum of an irrational number and a rational number is irrational. Let us assume that the given statement, p, is false. That is, we assume that the sum of an irrational number and a rational number is rational.
Therefore,
, where
is irrational and b, c, d, e are integers.
is a rational number and
is an irrational number.
This is a contradiction. Therefore, our assumption is wrong. Therefore, the sum of an irrational number and a rational number is rational. Thus, the given statement is true. (ii) The given statement, q, is as follows. If n is a real number with n > 3, then n2 > 9. Let us assume that n is a real number with n > 3, but n2 > 9 is not true.
Class XI That is, n2 < 9
Maths
Then, n > 3 and n is a real number. Squaring both the sides, we obtain n2 > (3)2 n2 > 9, which is a contradiction, since we have assumed that n2 < 9. Thus, the given statement is true. That is, if n is a real number with n > 3, then n2 > 9.
Question 7: Write the following statement in five different ways, conveying the same meaning. p: If triangle is equiangular, then it is an obtuse angled triangle. Answer The given statement can be written in five different ways as follows. (i) A triangle is equiangular implies that it is an obtuse-angled triangle. (ii) A triangle is equiangular only if it is an obtuse-angled triangle. (iii) For a triangle to be equiangular, it is necessary that the triangle is an obtuse-angled triangle. (iv) For a triangle to be an obtuse-angled triangle, it is sufficient that the triangle is equiangular. (v) If a triangle is not an obtuse-angled triangle, then the triangle is not equiangular.
Class XI
Chapter 15 Statistics
Maths
Exercise 15.1
Question 1: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 17 Answer The given data is 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 17
Mean of the data, The deviations of the respective observations from the mean 6, 3, 2, 1, 0, 2, 3, 7 The absolute values of the deviations, i.e. 6, 3, 2, 1, 0, 2, 3, 7 The required mean deviation about the mean is , are are
Question 2: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data 38, 70, 48, 40, 42, 55, 63, 46, 54, 44 Answer The given data is 38, 70, 48, 40, 42, 55, 63, 46, 54, 44 Mean of the given data,
The deviations of the respective observations from the mean 12, 20, 2, 10, 8, 5, 13, 4, 4, 6 The absolute values of the deviations, i.e. 12, 20, 2, 10, 8, 5, 13, 4, 4, 6
are
, are
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XI
Maths
The required mean deviation about the mean is
Question 3: Find the mean deviation about the median for the data. 13, 17, 16, 14, 11, 13, 10, 16, 11, 18, 12, 17 Answer The given data is 13, 17, 16, 14, 11, 13, 10, 16, 11, 18, 12, 17 Here, the numbers of observations are 12, which is even. Arranging the data in ascending order, we obtain 10, 11, 11, 12, 13, 13, 14, 16, 16, 17, 17, 18
The deviations of the respective observations from the median, i.e. 3.5, 2.5, 2.5, 1.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 2.5, 2.5, 3.5, 3.5, 4.5 The absolute values of the deviations, , are
are
3.5, 2.5, 2.5, 1.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 2.5, 2.5, 3.5, 3.5, 4.5 The required mean deviation about the median is
Class XI
Maths
Question 4: Find the mean deviation about the median for the data 36, 72, 46, 42, 60, 45, 53, 46, 51, 49 Answer The given data is 36, 72, 46, 42, 60, 45, 53, 46, 51, 49 Here, the number of observations is 10, which is even. Arranging the data in ascending order, we obtain 36, 42, 45, 46, 46, 49, 51, 53, 60, 72
The deviations of the respective observations from the median, i.e. 11.5, 5.5, 2.5, 1.5, 1.5, 1.5, 3.5, 5.5, 12.5, 24.5 The absolute values of the deviations, , are
are
11.5, 5.5, 2.5, 1.5, 1.5, 1.5, 3.5, 5.5, 12.5, 24.5 Thus, the required mean deviation about the median is
Class XI
Maths
Question 5: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data. xi fi 5 7 10 4 15 6 20 3 25 5
Answer
xi 5 10 15 20 25
fi 7 4 6 3 5 25
fi xi 35 40 90 60 125 350 9 4 1 6 11 63 16 6 18 55 158
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data xi fi 10 4 30 24 50 28 70 16 90 8
Answer
xi 10 30 50 70 90
fi 4 24 28 16 8 80
fi xi 40 720 1400 1120 720 4000 40 20 0 20 40 160 480 0 320 320 1280
Class XI
Maths
Question 7: Find the mean deviation about the median for the data. xi fi 5 8 7 6 9 2 10 2 12 2 15 6
Answer The given observations are already in ascending order. Adding a column corresponding to cumulative frequencies of the given data, we obtain the following table. xi 5 7 9 10 12 15 fi 8 6 2 2 2 6 c.f. 8 14 16 18 20 26
Here, N = 26, which is even. Median is the mean of 13th and 14th observations. Both of these observations lie in the cumulative frequency 14, for which the corresponding observation is 7.
Class XI
Maths
The absolute values of the deviations from median, i.e. |xi M| fi 2 8 16 fi |xi M| 0 6 0 2 2 4 3 2 6 5 2 10 8 6 48
are
and
Question 8: Find the mean deviation about the median for the data xi fi 15 3 21 5 27 6 30 7 35 8
Answer The given observations are already in ascending order. Adding a column corresponding to cumulative frequencies of the given data, we obtain the following table. xi 15 21 27 30 35 fi 3 5 6 7 8 c.f. 3 8 14 21 29
Here, N = 29, which is odd.

Class XI
Maths
observation = 15th observation This observation lies in the cumulative frequency 21, for which the corresponding observation is 30. Median = 30 The absolute values of the deviations from median, i.e. |xi M| fi fi |xi M| 15 3 45 9 5 45 3 6 18 0 7 0 5 8 40 are
Question 9: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data. Income per day 0-100 100-200 200-300 300-400 400-500 500-600 600-700 Number of persons 4 8 9 10 7 5 4
Class XI 700-800 Answer The following table is formed. Income per day 0 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 600 700 700 800 3
Maths
Number of persons fi 4 8 9 10 7 5 4 3 50
Mid-point xi 50 150 250 350 450 550 650 750
fi xi
200 1200 2250 3500 3150 2750 2600 2250 17900
308 208 108 8 92 192 292 392
1232 1664 972 80 644 960 1168 1176 7896
Here,
Question 10: Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data Height in cms Number of boys
Class XI 95-105 105-115 115-125 125-135 135-145 145-155 Answer The following table is formed. Height in cms 95-105 105-115 115-125 125-135 135-145 145-155 9 13 26 30 12 10
Maths
Number of boys fi 9 13 26 30 12 10
Mid-point xi 100 110 120 130 140 150
fi xi 900 1430 3120 3900 1680 1500 25.3 15.3 5.3 4.7 14.7 24.7 227.7 198.9 137.8 141 176.4 247
Here,
Question 11: Find the mean deviation about median for the following data:
Class XI Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Answer The following table is formed. Marks Number of boys fi 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 6 8 14 16 4 2 50 Number of girls 6 8 14 16 4 2
Maths
Cumulative frequency (c.f.) 6 14 28 44 48 50
Midpoint xi 5 15 25 35 45 55
|xi Med.| 22.85 12.85 2.85 7.15 17.15 27.15
fi |xi Med.| 137.1 102.8 39.9 114.4 68.6 54.3 517.1
The class interval containing the
or 25th item is 20 30.
Therefore, 20 30 is the median class. It is known that,
Class XI
Maths
Here, l = 20, C = 14, f = 14, h = 10, and N = 50
Median = Thus, mean deviation about the median is given by,
Question 12: Calculate the mean deviation about median age for the age distribution of 100 persons given below: Age 16-20 21-25 26-30 31-35 36-40 41-45 46-50 51-55 Answer The given data is not continuous. Therefore, it has to be converted into continuous frequency distribution by subtracting 0.5 from the lower limit and adding 0.5 to the upper limit of each class interval. The table is formed as follows.
Number 5 6 12 14 26 12 16 9
Class XI Age Number fi 15.520.5 20.525.5 25.530.5 30.535.5 35.540.5 40.545.5 45.550.5 50.555.5 100 9 16 12 26 14 12 6 5
Chapter 15 Statistics Cumulative frequency (c.f.) 5 Midpoint xi 18 |xi Med.| 20
Maths fi |xi Med.| 100
11
23
15
90
23
28
10
120
37
33
70
63
38
75
43
60
91
48
10
160
100
53
15
135
735
The class interval containing the
or 50th item is 35.5 40.5.
Therefore, 35.5 40.5 is the median class. It is known that,
Class XI
Maths
Here, l = 35.5, C = 37, f = 26, h = 5, and N = 100
Thus, mean deviation about the median is given by,
Exercise 15.2
Question 1: Find the mean and variance for the data 6, 7, 10, 12, 13, 4, 8, 12 Answer 6, 7, 10, 12, 13, 4, 8, 12
Mean, The following table is obtained.

Class XI xi
Maths
6 7 10 12 13 4 8 12
3 2 1 3 4 5 1 3
9 4 1 9 16 25 1 9 74
Question 2: Find the mean and variance for the first n natural numbers Answer The mean of first n natural numbers is calculated as follows.
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: Find the mean and variance for the first 10 multiples of 3 Answer The first 10 multiples of 3 are 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30 Here, number of observations, n = 10
The following table is obtained.
Class XI xi
Maths
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
13.5 10.5 7.5 4.5 1.5 1.5 4.5 7.5 10.5 13.5
182.25 110.25 56.25 20.25 2.25 2.25 20.25 56.25 110.25 182.25 742.5
Question 4: Find the mean and variance for the data xi fi 6 2 10 4 14 7 18 12 24 8 28 4 30 3
Answer The data is obtained in tabular form as follows.
Class XI
Maths
xi 6 10 14 18 24 28 30
fi 2 4 7 12 8 4 3 40
fixi 12 40 98 216 192 112 90 760 13 9 5 1 5 9 11 169 81 25 1 25 81 121 338 324 175 12 200 324 363 1736
Here, N = 40,
Question 5: Find the mean and variance for the data xi fi 92 3 93 2 97 3 98 2 102 6 104 3 109 3

Class XI
Maths
xi 92 93 97 98 102 104 109
fi 3 2 3 2 6 3 3 22
fixi 276 186 291 196 612 312 327 2200 8 7 3 2 2 4 9 64 49 9 4 4 16 81 192 98 27 8 24 48 243 640
Here, N = 22,
Question 6: Find the mean and standard deviation using short-cut method. xi fi 60 2 61 1 62 12 63 29 64 25 65 12 66 10 67 4 68 5
Class XI
Maths
xi
fi
yi2
fiyi
fiyi2
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
2 1 12 29 25 12 10 4 5 100
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 220
16 9 4 1 0 1 4 9 16
8 3 24 29 0 12 20 12 20 0
32 9 48 29 0 12 40 36 80 286
Mean,
Question 7: Find the mean and variance for the following frequency distribution. Classes 0-30 30-60 60-90 90-120 120-150 150-180 180-210
Class XI Frequencies 2 3 5
Chapter 15 Statistics 10 3 5 2
Maths
Answer
Class
Frequency fi
Mid-point xi
yi2
fiyi
fiyi2
0-30 30-60 60-90 90-120 120-150 150-180 180-210
2 3 5 10 3 5 2 30
15 45 75 105 135 165 195
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
9 4 1 0 1 4 9
6 6 5 0 3 10 6 2
18 12 5 0 3 20 18 76
Mean,
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: Find the mean and variance for the following frequency distribution. Classes Frequencies 0-10 5 10-20 8 20-30 15 30-40 16 40-50 6
Answer
Class
Frequency fi 5 8 15 16 6 50
Mid-point xi
yi2
fiyi
fiyi2
0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50
5 15 25 35 45
2 1 0 1 2
4 1 0 1 4
10 8 0 16 12 10
20 8 0 16 24 68
Mean,
Class XI
Maths
Question 9: Find the mean, variance and standard deviation using short-cut method Height in cms 70-75 75-80 80-85 85-90 90-95 95-100 100-105 105-110 110-115 3 4 7 7 15 9 6 6 Class 3 Interva l 70-75 Frequenc y fi Midpoin t xi 72.5 4 16 yi
2
No. of children
Answer
fiy
i
fiyi
2
12
48
75-80
77.5
12
36
80-85
82.5
14
28
85-90 90-95
7 15
87.5 92.5
1 0
1 0
7 0
7 0
Class XI
Chapter 15 Statistics 95-100 100-105 9 6 97.5 102. 5 105-110 6 107. 5 110-115 3 112. 5 60 6 4 16 12 3 9 18 1 2 1 4 9 12
Maths 9 24
54
48
25 4
Mean,
Question 10: The diameters of circles (in mm) drawn in a design are given below: Diameters 33-36 37-40 41-44 No. of children 15 17 21
Class XI 45-48 49-52 22 25
Maths
Answer
Class Interval
Frequency fi
Mid-point xi
fi2
fiyi
fiyi2
32.5-36.5 36.5-40.5 40.5-44.5 44.5-48.5 48.5-52.5
15 17 21 22 25 100
34.5 38.5 42.5 46.5 50.5
2 1 0 1 2
4 1 0 1 4
30 17 0 22 50 25
60 17 0 22 100 199
Here, N = 100, h = 4 Let the assumed mean, A, be 42.5.
Mean,
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 15.3
Question 1: From the data given below state which group is more variable, A or B? Marks Group A 10-20 9 20-30 17 30-40 32 40-50 33 50-60 40 60-70 10 70-80 9
Class XI Group B Answer 10 20 30
Chapter 15 Statistics 25 43 15 7
Maths
Firstly, the standard deviation of group A is calculated as follows. Marks Group A fi Mid-point xi yi2 fiyi fiyi2
10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80
9 17 32 33 40 10 9 150
15 25 35 45 55 65 75
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
9 4 1 0 1 4 9
27 34 32 0 40 20 27 6
81 68 32 0 40 40 81 342
Here, h = 10, N = 150, A = 45
The standard deviation of group B is calculated as follows.
Class XI Marks Group B fi 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 10 20 30 25 43 15 7 150 Mid-point xi 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
Chapter 15 Statistics yi2 fiyi fiyi2
Maths
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
9 4 1 0 1 4 9
30 40 30 0 43 30 21 6
90 80 30 0 43 60 63 366
Since the mean of both the groups is same, the group with greater standard deviation will be more variable. Thus, group B has more variability in the marks.
Question 2: From the prices of shares X and Y below, find out which is more stable in value:
Class XI X Y 35 108 54 107 52 105 53 105 56 106
Chapter 15 Statistics 58 107 52 104 50 103 51 104 49 101
Maths
Answer The prices of the shares X are 35, 54, 52, 53, 56, 58, 52, 50, 51, 49 Here, the number of observations, N = 10
The following table is obtained corresponding to shares X. xi
35 54 52 53 56 58 52 50 51 49
16 3 1 2 5 7 1 1 0 2
256 9 1 4 25 49 1 1 0 4 350
Class XI
Maths
The prices of share Y are 108, 107, 105, 105, 106, 107, 104, 103, 104, 101
The following table is obtained corresponding to shares Y. yi
108 107 105 105 106 107 104 103 104 101
3 2 0 0 1 2 1 2 1 4
9 4 0 0 1 4 1 4 1 16 40
Class XI
Maths
C.V. of prices of shares X is greater than the C.V. of prices of shares Y. Thus, the prices of shares Y are more stable than the prices of shares X.
Question 3: An analysis of monthly wages paid to workers in two firms A and B, belonging to the same industry, gives the following results: Firm A No. of wage earners Mean of monthly wages Variance of the distribution of wages 586 Rs 5253 100 Firm B 648 Rs 5253 121
(i) Which firm A or B pays larger amount as monthly wages? (ii) Which firm, A or B, shows greater variability in individual wages? Answer (i) Monthly wages of firm A = Rs 5253 Number of wage earners in firm A = 586 Total amount paid = Rs 5253 586 Monthly wages of firm B = Rs 5253 Number of wage earners in firm B = 648 Total amount paid = Rs 5253 648 Thus, firm B pays the larger amount as monthly wages as the number of wage earners in firm B are more than the number of wage earners in firm A. (ii) Variance of the distribution of wages in firm A = 100
Standard deviation of the distribution of wages in firm A ((1) =

Class XI
Maths
Variance of the distribution of wages in firm
= 121
Standard deviation of the distribution of wages in firm The mean of monthly wages of both the firms is same i.e., 5253. Therefore, the firm with greater standard deviation will have more variability. Thus, firm B has greater variability in the individual wages.
Question 4: The following is the record of goals scored by team A in a football session: No. of goals scored No. of matches 0 1 1 9 2 7 3 5 4 3
For the team B, mean number of goals scored per match was 2 with a standard deviation 1.25 goals. Find which team may be considered more consistent? Answer The mean and the standard deviation of goals scored by team A are calculated as follows. No. of goals scored 0 1 2 3 4 No. of matches 1 9 7 5 3 25 fixi 0 9 14 15 12 50 xi2 0 1 4 9 16 fixi2 0 9 28 45 48 130
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the mean of both the teams is same.
The standard deviation of team B is 1.25 goals. The average number of goals scored by both the teams is same i.e., 2. Therefore, the team with lower standard deviation will be more consistent. Thus, team A is more consistent than team B.
Question 5: The sum and sum of squares corresponding to length x (in cm) and weight y (in gm) of 50 plant products are given below:
Which is more varying, the length or weight? Answer
Here, N = 50
Mean,
Class XI
Maths
Mean,
Class XI
Maths
Thus, C.V. of weights is greater than the C.V. of lengths. Therefore, weights vary more than the lengths.
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: The mean and variance of eight observations are 9 and 9.25, respectively. If six of the observations are 6, 7, 10, 12, 12 and 13, find the remaining two observations. Answer Let the remaining two observations be x and y. Therefore, the observations are 6, 7, 10, 12, 12, 13, x, y.
From (1), we obtain x2 + y2 + 2xy = 144 (3) From (2) and (3), we obtain 2xy = 64 (4) Subtracting (4) from (2), we obtain x2 + y2 2xy = 80 64 = 16 x y = 4 (5) Therefore, from (1) and (5), we obtain
Class XI x = 8 and y = 4, when x y = 4
Maths
x = 4 and y = 8, when x y = 4 Thus, the remaining observations are 4 and 8.
Question 2: The mean and variance of 7 observations are 8 and 16, respectively. If five of the observations are 2, 4, 10, 12 and 14. Find the remaining two observations. Answer Let the remaining two observations be x and y. The observations are 2, 4, 10, 12, 14, x, y.
From (1), we obtain x2 + y2 + 2xy = 196 (3) From (2) and (3), we obtain 2xy = 196 100 2xy = 96 (4) Subtracting (4) from (2), we obtain x2 + y2 2xy = 100 96
Class XI (x y)2 = 4 x y = 2 (5)
Maths
Therefore, from (1) and (5), we obtain x = 8 and y = 6 when x y = 2 x = 6 and y = 8 when x y = 2 Thus, the remaining observations are 6 and 8.
Question 3: The mean and standard deviation of six observations are 8 and 4, respectively. If each observation is multiplied by 3, find the new mean and new standard deviation of the resulting observations. Answer Let the observations be x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, and x6. It is given that mean is 8 and standard deviation is 4.
If each observation is multiplied by 3 and the resulting observations are yi, then
From (1) and (2), it can be observed that,
Class XI
Maths
Substituting the values of xi and
in (2), we obtain
Therefore, variance of new observations = Hence, the standard deviation of new observations is
Question 4: Given that is the mean and 2 is the variance of n observations x1, x2 xn. Prove that and a2 2,
the mean and variance of the observations ax1, ax2, ax3 axn are respectively (a 0). Answer The given n observations are x1, x2 xn. Mean = Variance = 2
If each observation is multiplied by a and the new observations are yi, then
Therefore, mean of the observations, ax1, ax2 axn, is Substituting the values of xiand in (1), we obtain
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the variance of the observations, ax1, ax2 axn, is a2 2.
Question 5: The mean and standard deviation of 20 observations are found to be 10 and 2, respectively. On rechecking, it was found that an observation 8 was incorrect. Calculate the correct mean and standard deviation in each of the following cases: (i) If wrong item is omitted. (ii) If it is replaced by 12. Answer (i) Number of observations (n) = 20 Incorrect mean = 10 Incorrect standard deviation = 2
That is, incorrect sum of observations = 200 Correct sum of observations = 200 8 = 192
Correct mean
Class XI
Maths
(ii) When 8 is replaced by 12, Incorrect sum of observations = 200 Correct sum of observations = 200 8 + 12 = 204
Class XI
Maths
Question 6: The mean and standard deviation of marks obtained by 50 students of a class in three subjects, Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry are given below: Subject Mean Standard deviation Mathematics 42 12 Physics 32 15 Chemistry 40.9 20
Which of the three subjects shows the highest variability in marks and which shows the lowest? Answer
Class XI
Maths
Standard deviation of Mathematics = 12 Standard deviation of Physics = 15 Standard deviation of Chemistry = 20
The coefficient of variation (C.V.) is given by
The subject with greater C.V. is more variable than others. Therefore, the highest variability in marks is in Chemistry and the lowest variability in marks is in Mathematics.
Question 7: The mean and standard deviation of a group of 100 observations were found to be 20 and 3, respectively. Later on it was found that three observations were incorrect, which were recorded as 21, 21 and 18. Find the mean and standard deviation if the incorrect observations are omitted. Answer Number of observations (n) = 100 Incorrect mean Incorrect standard deviation
Incorrect sum of observations = 2000 Correct sum of observations = 2000 21 21 18 = 2000 60 = 1940
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Chapter 16 Probability
Maths
Exercise 16.1
Question 1: Describe the sample space for the indicated experiment: A coin is tossed three times. Answer A coin has two faces: head (H) and tail (T). When a coin is tossed three times, the total number of possible outcomes is 23 = 8 Thus, when a coin is tossed three times, the sample space is given by: S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT}
Question 2: Describe the sample space for the indicated experiment: A die is thrown two times. Answer When a die is thrown, the possible outcomes are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. When a die is thrown two times, the sample space is given by S = {(x, y): x, y = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} The number of elements in this sample space is 6 6 = 36, while the sample space is given by: S = {(1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (1, 6), (2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, 5), (2, 6), (3, 1), (3, 2), (3, 3), (3, 4), (3, 5), (3, 6), (4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (4, 4), (4, 5), (4, 6), (5, 1), (5, 2), (5, 3), (5, 4), (5, 5), (5, 6), (6, 1), (6, 2), (6, 3), (6, 4), (6, 5), (6, 6)}
Question 3: Describe the sample space for the indicated experiment: A coin is tossed four times. Answer When a coin is tossed once, there are two possible outcomes: head (H) and tail (T). When a coin is tossed four times, the total number of possible outcomes is 24 = 16 Thus, when a coin is tossed four times, the sample space is given by: S = {HHHH, HHHT, HHTH, HHTT, HTHH, HTHT, HTTH, HTTT, THHH, THHT, THTH, THTT, TTHH, TTHT, TTTH, TTTT}
Question 4: Describe the sample space for the indicated experiment: A coin is tossed and a die is thrown.
Class XI Answer
Maths
A coin has two faces: head (H) and tail (T). A die has six faces that are numbered from 1 to 6, with one number on each face. Thus, when a coin is tossed and a die is thrown, the sample space is given by: S = {H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6}
Question 5: Describe the sample space for the indicated experiment: A coin is tossed and then a die is rolled only in case a head is shown on the coin. Answer A coin has two faces: head (H) and tail (T). A die has six faces that are numbered from 1 to 6, with one number on each face. Thus, when a coin is tossed and then a die is rolled only in case a head is shown on the coin, the sample space is given by: S = {H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, T}
Question 6: 2 boys and 2 girls are in Room X, and 1 boy and 3 girls in Room Y. Specify the sample space for the experiment in which a room is selected and then a person. Answer Let us denote 2 boys and 2 girls in room X as B1, B2 and G1, G2 respectively. Let us denote 1 boy and 3 girls in room Y as B3, and G3, G4, G5 respectively. Accordingly, the required sample space is given by S = {XB1, XB2, XG1, XG2, YB3, YG3, YG4, YG5}
Question 7: One die of red colour, one of white colour and one of blue colour are placed in a bag. One die is selected at random and rolled, its colour and the number on its uppermost face is noted. Describe the sample space. Answer A die has six faces that are numbered from 1 to 6, with one number on each face. Let us denote the red, white, and blue dices as R, W, and B respectively. Accordingly, when a die is selected and then rolled, the sample space is given by
Class XI
Maths
S = {R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, W1, W2, W3, W4, W5, W6, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6}
Question 8: An experiment consists of recording boy-girl composition of families with 2 children. (i) What is the sample space if we are interested in knowing whether it is a boy or girl in the order of their births? (ii) What is the sample space if we are interested in the number of girls in the family? Answer (i) When the order of the birth of a girl or a boy is considered, the sample space is given by S = {GG, GB, BG, BB} (ii) Since the maximum number of children in each family is 2, a family can either have 2 girls or 1 girl or no girl. Hence, the required sample space is S = {0, 1, 2}
Question 9: A box contains 1 red and 3 identical white balls. Two balls are drawn at random in succession without replacement. Write the sample space for this experiment. Answer It is given that the box contains 1 red ball and 3 identical white balls. Let us denote the red ball with R and a white ball with W. When two balls are drawn at random in succession without replacement, the sample space is given by S = {RW, WR, WW}
Question 10: An experiment consists of tossing a coin and then throwing it second time if a head occurs. If a tail occurs on the first toss, then a die is rolled once. Find the sample space. Answer A coin has two faces: head (H) and tail (T). A die has six faces that are numbered from 1 to 6, with one number on each face. Thus, in the given experiment, the sample space is given by S = {HH, HT, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6}
Class XI
Maths
Question 11: Suppose 3 bulbs are selected at random from a lot. Each bulb is tested and classified as defective (D) or non-defective (N). Write the sample space of this experiment? Answer 3 bulbs are to be selected at random from the lot. Each bulb in the lot is tested and classified as defective (D) or non-defective (N). The sample space of this experiment is given by S = {DDD, DDN, DND, DNN, NDD, NDN, NND, NNN}
Question 12: A coin is tossed. If the out come is a head, a die is thrown. If the die shows up an even number, the die is thrown again. What is the sample space for the experiment? Answer When a coin is tossed, the possible outcomes are head (H) and tail (T). When a die is thrown, the possible outcomes are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. Thus, the sample space of this experiment is given by: S = {T, H1, H3, H5, H21, H22, H23, H24, H25, H26, H41, H42, H43, H44, H45, H46, H61, H62, H63, H64, H65, H66}
Question 13: The numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are written separately on four slips of paper. The slips are put in a box and mixed thoroughly. A person draws two slips from the box, one after the other, without replacement. Describe the sample space for the experiment. Answer If 1 appears on the first drawn slip, then the possibilities that the number appears on the second drawn slip are 2, 3, or 4. Similarly, if 2 appears on the first drawn slip, then the possibilities that the number appears on the second drawn slip are 1, 3, or 4. The same holds true for the remaining numbers too. Thus, the sample space of this experiment is given by S = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 1), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 1), (3, 2), (3, 4), (4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3)}
Question 14:
Class XI
Maths
An experiment consists of rolling a die and then tossing a coin once if the number on the die is even. If the number on the die is odd, the coin is tossed twice. Write the sample space for this experiment. Answer A die has six faces that are numbered from 1 to 6, with one number on each face. Among these numbers, 2, 4, and 6 are even numbers, while 1, 3, and 5 are odd numbers. A coin has two faces: head (H) and tail (T). Hence, the sample space of this experiment is given by: S = {2H, 2T, 4H, 4T, 6H, 6T, 1HH, 1HT, 1TH, 1TT, 3HH, 3HT, 3TH, 3TT, 5HH, 5HT, 5TH, 5TT}
Question 15: A coin is tossed. If it shows a tail, we draw a ball from a box which contains 2 red and 3 black balls. If it shows head, we throw a die. Find the sample space for this experiment. Answer The box contains 2 red balls and 3 black balls. Let us denote the 2 red balls as R1, R2 and the 3 black balls as B1, B2, and B3. The sample space of this experiment is given by S = {TR1, TR2, TB1, TB2, TB3, H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6}
Question 16: A die is thrown repeatedly until a six comes up. What is the sample space for this experiment? Answer In this experiment, six may come up on the first throw, the second throw, the third throw and so on till six is obtained. Hence, the sample space of this experiment is given by S = {6, (1, 6), (2, 6), (3, 6), (4, 6), (5, 6), (1, 1, 6), (1, 2, 6), , (1, 5, 6), (2, 1, 6), (2, 2, 6), , (2, 5, 6), ,(5, 1, 6), (5, 2, 6), }
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 16.2
Question 1: A die is rolled. Let E be the event die shows 4 and F be the event die shows even number. Are E and F mutually exclusive? Answer When a die is rolled, the sample space is given by S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} Accordingly, E = {4} and F = {2, 4, 6} It is observed that E F = {4} Therefore, E and F are not mutually exclusive events.
Question 2: A die is thrown. Describe the following events: (i) A: a number less than 7 (ii) B: a number greater than 7 (iii) C: a multiple of 3 (iv) D: a number less than 4 (v) E: an even number greater than 4 (vi) F: a number not less than 3 Also find Answer When a die is thrown, the sample space is given by S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Accordingly: (i) A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) B = (iii) C = {3, 6} (iv) D = {1, 2, 3}
Class XI (v) E = {6} (vi) F = {3, 4, 5, 6}
Maths
A B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, A B = B C = {3, 6}, E F = {6} D E =, A C = {1, 2, 4, 5} D E = {1, 2, 3},
Question 3: An experiment involves rolling a pair of dice and recording the numbers that come up. Describe the following events: A: the sum is greater than 8, B: 2 occurs on either die C: The sum is at least 7 and a multiple of 3. Which pairs of these events are mutually exclusive? Answer When a pair of dice is rolled, the sample space is given by
It is observed that A B =
Class XI B C =
Maths
Hence, events A and B and events B and C are mutually exclusive.
Question 4: Three coins are tossed once. Let A denote the event three heads show, B denote the event two heads and one tail show. C denote the event three tails show and D denote the event a head shows on the first coin. Which events are (i) mutually exclusive? (ii) simple? (iii) compound? Answer When three coins are tossed, the sample space is given by S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT} Accordingly, A = {HHH} B = {HHT, HTH, THH} C = {TTT} D = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT} We now observe that A B =, A C =, A D = {HHH} B C =, B D = {HHT, {HTH} CD= (i) Event A and B; event A and C; event B and C; and event C and D are all mutually exclusive. (ii) If an event has only one sample point of a sample space, it is called a simple event. Thus, A and C are simple events. (iii) If an event has more than one sample point of a sample space, it is called a compound event. Thus, B and D are compound events.
Question 5: Three coins are tossed. Describe (i) Two events which are mutually exclusive. (ii) Three events which are mutually exclusive and exhaustive. (iii) Two events, which are not mutually exclusive.
Class XI
Maths
(iv) Two events which are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive. (v) Three events which are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive. Answer When three coins are tossed, the sample space is given by S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT} (i) Two events that are mutually exclusive can be A: getting no heads and B: getting no tails This is because sets A = {TTT} and B = {HHH} are disjoint. (ii) Three events that are mutually exclusive and exhaustive can be A: getting no heads B: getting exactly one head C: getting at least two heads i.e., A = {TTT} B = {HTT, THT, TTH} C = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH} This is because A B = B C = C A = and A B C = S (iii) Two events that are not mutually exclusive can be A: getting three heads B: getting at least 2 heads i.e., A = {HHH} B = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH} This is because A B = {HHH} (iv) Two events which are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive can be A: getting exactly one head B: getting exactly one tail That is A = {HTT, THT, TTH} B = {HHT, HTH, THH} It is because, A B =, but A B S (v) Three events that are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive can be A: getting exactly three heads
Class XI
Maths
B: getting one head and two tails C: getting one tail and two heads i.e., A = {HHH} B = {HTT, THT, TTH} C = {HHT, HTH, THH} This is because A B = B C = C A = , but A B C S
Question 6: Two dice are thrown. The events A, B and C are as follows: A: getting an even number on the first die. B: getting an odd number on the first die. C: getting the sum of the numbers on the dice 5 Describe the events (i) (ii) not B (iii) A or B
(iv) A and B (v) A but not C (vi) B or C (vii) B and C (viii) Answer When two dice are thrown, the sample space is given by
Class XI
Maths
Class XI
Maths
(vii) B and C = B C
Question 7: Two dice are thrown. The events A, B and C are as follows: A: getting an even number on the first die. B: getting an odd number on the first die. C: getting the sum of the numbers on the dice 5
Class XI
Maths
State true or false: (give reason for your answer) (i) A and B are mutually exclusive (ii) A and B are mutually exclusive and exhaustive (iii) (iv) A and C are mutually exclusive (v) A and (vi) Answer are mutually exclusive are mutually exclusive and exhaustive.
(i) It is observed that A B = A and B are mutually exclusive. Thus, the given statement is true. (ii) It is observed that A B = and A B = S A and B are mutually exclusive and exhaustive. Thus, the given statement is true. (iii) It is observed that
Thus, the given statement is true. (iv) It is observed that A C = {(2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (4, 1)} A and C are not mutually exclusive. Thus, the given statement is false. (v)
A and
are not mutually exclusive.
Thus, the given statement is false.

Class XI (vi) It is observed that However, Therefore, events
Chapter 16 Probability ;
Maths
are not mutually exclusive and exhaustive.
Thus, the given statement is false.
Class XI
Maths
Exercise 16.3
Question 1: Which of the following can not be valid assignment of probabilities for outcomes of sample space S = Assignment (a) (b) 1 0.1 2 0.01 3 0.05 4 0.03 5 0.01 6 0.2 7 0.6
(c) (d) (e)
0.1 0.1
0.2 0.2
0.3 0.3
0.4 0.4
0.5 0.2
0.6 0.1
0.7 0.3
Answer (a) 1 0.1 2 0.01 3 0.05 4 0.03 5 0.01 6 0.2 7 0.6
Here, each of the numbers p(i) is positive and less than 1. Sum of probabilities
Thus, the assignment is valid.
Class XI (b) 1 2 3 4 5
Maths
Thus, the assignment is valid. (c) 1 0.1 2 0.2 3 0.3 4 0.4 5 0.5 6 0.6 7 0.7
Thus, the assignment is not valid. (d) 1 0.1 2 0.2 3 0.3 4 0.4 5 0.2 6 0.1 7 0.3
Here, p(1) and p(5) are negative. Hence, the assignment is not valid. (e) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Class XI
Maths
Here, Hence, the assignment is not valid.
Question 2: A coin is tossed twice, what is the probability that at least one tail occurs? Answer When a coin is tossed twice, the sample space is given by S = {HH, HT, TH, TT} Let A be the event of the occurrence of at least one tail. Accordingly, A = {HT, TH, TT}
Question 3: A die is thrown, find the probability of following events: (i) A prime number will appear, (ii) A number greater than or equal to 3 will appear, (iii) A number less than or equal to one will appear, (iv) A number more than 6 will appear, (v) A number less than 6 will appear. Answer The sample space of the given experiment is given by S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (i) Let A be the event of the occurrence of a prime number. Accordingly, A = {2, 3, 5}
Class XI
Maths
(ii) Let B be the event of the occurrence of a number greater than or equal to 3. Accordingly, B = {3, 4, 5, 6}
(iii) Let C be the event of the occurrence of a number less than or equal to one. Accordingly, C = {1}
(iv) Let D be the event of the occurrence of a number greater than 6. Accordingly, D =
(v) Let E be the event of the occurrence of a number less than 6. Accordingly, E = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
Question 4: A card is selected from a pack of 52 cards. (a) How many points are there in the sample space? (b) Calculate the probability that the card is an ace of spades. (c) Calculate the probability that the card is (i) an ace (ii) black card. Answer (a) When a card is selected from a pack of 52 cards, the number of possible outcomes is 52 i.e., the sample space contains 52 elements. Therefore, there are 52 points in the sample space. (b) Let A be the event in which the card drawn is an ace of spades. Accordingly, n(A) = 1
Class XI
Maths
(c) (i)Let E be the event in which the card drawn is an ace. Since there are 4 aces in a pack of 52 cards, n(E) = 4
(ii)Let F be the event in which the card drawn is black. Since there are 26 black cards in a pack of 52 cards, n(F) = 26
Question 5: A fair coin with 1 marked on one face and 6 on the other and a fair die are both tossed. Find the probability that the sum of numbers that turn up is (i) 3 (ii) 12 Answer Since the fair coin has 1 marked on one face and 6 on the other, and the die has six faces that are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the sample space is given by S = {(1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (1, 6), (6, 1), (6, 2), (6, 3), (6, 4), (6, 5), (6, 6)} Accordingly, n(S) = 12 (i) Let A be the event in which the sum of numbers that turn up is 3. Accordingly, A = {(1, 2)}
(ii) Let B be the event in which the sum of numbers that turn up is 12. Accordingly, B = {(6, 6)}
Question 6:
Class XI
Maths
There are four men and six women on the city council. If one council member is selected for a committee at random, how likely is it that it is a woman? Answer There are four men and six women on the city council. As one council member is to be selected for a committee at random, the sample space contains 10 (4 + 6) elements. Let A be the event in which the selected council member is a woman. Accordingly, n(A) = 6
Question 7: A fair coin is tossed four times, and a person win Re 1 for each head and lose Rs 1.50 for each tail that turns up. From the sample space calculate how many different amounts of money you can have after four tosses and the probability of having each of these amounts. Answer Since the coin is tossed four times, there can be a maximum of 4 heads or tails. When 4 heads turns up, is the gain.
When 3 heads and 1 tail turn up, Re 1 + Re 1 + Re 1 Rs 1.50 = Rs 3 Rs 1.50 = Rs 1.50 is the gain. When 2 heads and 2 tails turns up, Re 1 + Re 1 Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 = Re 1, i.e., Re 1 is the loss. When 1 head and 3 tails turn up, Re 1 Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 = Rs 3.50, i.e., Rs 3.50 is the loss. When 4 tails turn up, Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 Rs 1.50 = Rs 6.00, i.e., Rs 6.00 is the loss. There are 24 = 16 elements in the sample space S, which is given by: S = {HHHH, HHHT, HHTH, HTHH, THHH, HHTT, HTTH, TTHH, HTHT, THTH, THHT, HTTT, THTT, TTHT, TTTH, TTTT} n(S) = 16 The person wins Rs 4.00 when 4 heads turn up, i.e., when the event {HHHH} occurs.
Class XI
Maths
Probability (of winning Rs 4.00) = The person wins Rs 1.50 when 3 heads and one tail turn up, i.e., when the event {HHHT, HHTH, HTHH, THHH} occurs.
Probability (of winning Rs 1.50) = The person loses Re 1.00 when 2 heads and 2 tails turn up, i.e., when the event {HHTT, HTTH, TTHH, HTHT, THTH, THHT} occurs.
Probability (of losing Re 1.00) The person loses Rs 3.50 when 1 head and 3 tails turn up, i.e., when the event {HTTT, THTT, TTHT, TTTH} occurs.
Probability (of losing Rs 3.50) = The person loses Rs 6.00 when 4 tails turn up, i.e., when the event {TTTT} occurs.
Probability (of losing Rs 6.00) =
Question 8: Three coins are tossed once. Find the probability of getting (i) 3 heads (ii) 2 heads (iii) at least 2 heads (iv) at most 2 heads (v) no head (vi) 3 tails (vii) exactly two tails (viii) no tail (ix) at most two tails. Answer When three coins are tossed once, the sample space is given by S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH, HTT, THT, TTH, TTT} Accordingly, n(S) = 8 It is known that the probability of an event A is given by
Class XI
Maths
(i) Let B be the event of the occurrence of 3 heads. Accordingly, B = {HHH}
P(B) = (ii) Let C be the event of the occurrence of 2 heads. Accordingly, C = {HHT, HTH, THH}
P(C) = (iii) Let D be the event of the occurrence of at least 2 heads. Accordingly, D = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH}
P(D) = (iv) Let E be the event of the occurrence of at most 2 heads. Accordingly, E = {HHT, HTH, THH, HTT, THT, TTH, TTT}
P(E) = (v) Let F be the event of the occurrence of no head. Accordingly, F = {TTT}
P(F) = (vi) Let G be the event of the occurrence of 3 tails. Accordingly, G = {TTT}
P(G) = (vii) Let H be the event of the occurrence of exactly 2 tails. Accordingly, H = {HTT, THT, TTH}
P(H) = (viii) Let I be the event of the occurrence of no tail. Accordingly, I = {HHH}
Class XI
Maths
P(I) = (ix) Let J be the event of the occurrence of at most 2 tails. Accordingly, I = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH, HTT, THT, TTH}
P(J) =
Question 9:
If
is the probability of an event, what is the probability of the event not A.
Answer
It is given that P(A) =
Accordingly, P(not A) = 1 P(A)
Question 10: A letter is chosen at random from the word ASSASSINATION. Find the probability that letter is (i) a vowel (ii) an consonant Answer There are 13 letters in the word ASSASSINATION. Hence, n(S) = 13 (i) There are 6 vowels in the given word.
Probability (vowel) = (ii) There are 7 consonants in the given word.
Probability (consonant) =
Question 11:
Class XI
Maths
In a lottery, person choses six different natural numbers at random from 1 to 20, and if these six numbers match with the six numbers already fixed by the lottery committee, he wins the prize. What is the probability of winning the prize in the game? [Hint: order of the numbers is not important.] Answer Total number of ways in which one can choose six different numbers from 1 to 20
Hence, there are 38760 combinations of 6 numbers. Out of these combinations, one combination is already fixed by the lottery committee.
Required probability of winning the prize in the game =
Question 12: Check whether the following probabilities P(A) and P(B) are consistently defined (i) P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.7, P(A B) = 0.6 (ii) P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.4, P(A B) = 0.8 Answer (i) P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.7, P(A B) = 0.6 It is known that if E and F are two events such that E F, then P(E) P(F). However, here, P(A B) > P(A). Hence, P(A) and P(B) are not consistently defined. (ii)P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.4, P(A B) = 0.8 It is known that if E and F are two events such that E F, then P(E) P(F). Here, it is seen that P(A B) > P(A) and P(A B) > P(B). Hence, P(A) and P(B) are consistently defined.
Question 13: Fill in the blanks in following table: P(A) P(B) P(A B) P(A B)
Class XI (i)
Maths
(ii) (iii)
0.35 0.5
0.35
0.25
0.6 0.7
Answer
(i) Here, We know that
(ii) Here, P(A) = 0.35, P(A B) = 0.25, P(A B) = 0.6 We know that P(A B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A B) 0.6 = 0.35 + P(B) 0.25 P(B) = 0.6 0.35 + 0.25 P(B) = 0.5 (iii)Here, P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.35, P(A B) = 0.7 We know that P(A B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A B) 0.7 = 0.5 + 0.35 P(A B) P(A B) = 0.5 + 0.35 0.7 P(A B) = 0.15
Question 14:
Given P(A) = Answer
and P(B) =
. Find P(A or B), if A and B are mutually exclusive events.
Here, P(A) =
, P(B) =
For mutually exclusive events A and B, P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
Class XI
Maths
P(A or B)
Question 15:
If E and F are events such that P(E) = F), (ii) P(not E and not F). Answer
, P(F) =
and P(E and F) =
, find:(i) P(E or
Here, P(E) =
, P(F) =
, and P(E and F) =
(i) We know that P(E or F) = P(E) + P(F) P(E and F)
P(E or F) =
(ii) From (i), P(E or F) = P (E F) =
Question 16: Events E and F are such that P(not E or not F) = 0.25, State whether E and F are mutually exclusive. Answer It is given that P (not E or not F) = 0.25
Class XI
Maths
Thus, E and F are not mutually exclusive.
Question 17: A and B are events such that P(A) = 0.42, P(B) = 0.48 and P(A and B) = 0.16. Determine (i) P(not A), (ii) P (not B) and (iii) P(A or B). Answer It is given that P(A) = 0.42, P(B) = 0.48, P(A and B) = 0.16 (i) P(not A) = 1 P(A) = 1 0.42 = 0.58 (ii) P(not B) = 1 P(B) = 1 0.48 = 0.52 (iii) We know that P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A and B) P(A or B) = 0.42 + 0.48 0.16 = 0.74
Question 18: In Class XI of a school 40% of the students study Mathematics and 30% study Biology. 10% of the class study both Mathematics and Biology. If a student is selected at random from the class, find the probability that he will be studying Mathematics or Biology. Answer Let A be the event in which the selected student studies Mathematics and B be the event in which the selected student studies Biology.
Accordingly, P(A) = 40% =
P(B) = 30%
P(A or B) = 10%
Class XI
Maths
We know that P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A and B)
Thus, the probability that the selected student will be studying Mathematics or Biology is 0.6.
Question 19: In an entrance test that is graded on the basis of two examinations, the probability of a randomly chosen student passing the first examination is 0.8 and the probability of passing the second examination is 0.7. The probability of passing at least one of them is 0.95. What is the probability of passing both? Answer Let A and B be the events of passing first and second examinations respectively. Accordingly, P(A) = 0.8, P(B) = 0.7 and P(A or B) = 0.95 We know that P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A and B) 0.95 = 0.8 + 0.7 P(A and B) P(A and B) = 0.8 + 0.7 0.95 = 0.55 Thus, the probability of passing both the examinations is 0.55.
Question 20: The probability that a student will pass the final examination in both English and Hindi is 0.5 and the probability of passing neither is 0.1. If the probability of passing the English examination is 0.75, what is the probability of passing the Hindi examination? Answer Let A and B be the events of passing English and Hindi examinations respectively. Accordingly, P(A and B) = 0.5, P(not A and not B) = 0.1, i.e., P(A) = 0.75
We know that P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A and B)

Class XI 0.9 = 0.75 + P(B) 0.5 P(B) = 0.9 0.75 + 0.5 P(B) = 0.65
Maths
Thus, the probability of passing the Hindi examination is 0.65.
Question 21: In a class of 60 students, 30 opted for NCC, 32 opted for NSS and 24 opted for both NCC and NSS. If one of these students is selected at random, find the probability that (i) The student opted for NCC or NSS. (ii) The student has opted neither NCC nor NSS. (iii) The student has opted NSS but not NCC. Answer Let A be the event in which the selected student has opted for NCC and B be the event in which the selected student has opted for NSS. Total number of students = 60 Number of students who have opted for NCC = 30
P(A) = Number of students who have opted for NSS = 32
Number of students who have opted for both NCC and NSS = 24
(i) We know that P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A and B)
Thus, the probability that the selected student has opted for NCC or NSS is (ii)
Class XI
Maths
Thus, the probability that the selected students has neither opted for NCC nor NSS is . (iii) The given information can be represented by a Venn diagram as
It is clear that Number of students who have opted for NSS but not NCC = n(B A) = n(B) n(A B) = 32 24 = 8 Thus, the probability that the selected student has opted for NSS but not for NCC =
Class XI
Maths

Question 1: A box contains 10 red marbles, 20 blue marbles and 30 green marbles. 5 marbles are drawn from the box, what is the probability that (i) all will be blue? (ii) atleast one will be green? Answer Total number of marbles = 10 + 20 + 30 = 60 Number of ways of drawing 5 marbles from 60 marbles = (i) All the drawn marbles will be blue if we draw 5 marbles out of 20 blue marbles. 5 blue marbles can be drawn from 20 blue marbles in ways.
Probability that all marbles will be blue = (ii) Number of ways in which the drawn marble is not green =
Probability that no marble is green =
Probability that at least one marble is green =
Question 2: 4 cards are drawn from a well-shuffled deck of 52 cards. What is the probability of obtaining 3 diamonds and one spade? Answer Number of ways of drawing 4 cards from 52 cards = In a deck of 52 cards, there are 13 diamonds and 13 spades. Number of ways of drawing 3 diamonds and one spade =
Thus, the probability of obtaining 3 diamonds and one spade =
Class XI
Maths
Question 3: A die has two faces each with number 1, three faces each with number 2 and one face with number 3. If die is rolled once, determine (i) P(2) (ii) P(1 or 3) (iii) P(not 3) Answer Total number of faces = 6 (i) Number faces with number 2 = 3
(ii) P (1 or 3) = P (not 2) = 1 P (2) (iii) Number of faces with number 3 = 1
Question 4: In a certain lottery, 10,000 tickets are sold and ten equal prizes are awarded. What is the probability of not getting a prize if you buy (a) one ticket (b) two tickets (c) 10 tickets? Answer Total number of tickets sold = 10,000 Number prizes awarded = 10 (i) If we buy one ticket, then
P (getting a prize) =
P (not getting a prize) = (ii) If we buy two tickets, then Number of tickets not awarded = 10,000 10 = 9990
Class XI
Maths
P (not getting a prize) = (iii) If we buy 10 tickets, then
P (not getting a prize) =
Question 5: Out of 100 students, two sections of 40 and 60 are formed. If you and your friend are among the 100 students, what is the probability that (a) you both enter the same sections? (b) you both enter the different sections? Answer My friend and I are among the 100 students. Total number of ways of selecting 2 students out of 100 students = (a) The two of us will enter the same section if both of us are among 40 students or among 60 students. Number of ways in which both of us enter the same section = Probability that both of us enter the same section
(b) P(we enter different sections) = 1 P(we enter the same section)
Question 6: Three letters are dictated to three persons and an envelope is addressed to each of them, the letters are inserted into the envelopes at random so that each envelope
Class XI
Maths
contains exactly one letter. Find the probability that at least one letter is in its proper envelope. Answer Let L1, L2, L3 be three letters and E1, E2, and E3 be their corresponding envelops respectively. There are 6 ways of inserting 3 letters in 3 envelops. These are as follows:
There are 4 ways in which at least one letter is inserted in a proper envelope.
Thus, the required probability is
Question 7: A and B are two events such that P(A) = 0.54, P(B) = 0.69 and P(A B) = 0.35. Find (i) P(A B) (ii) P(A B) (iii) P(A B) (iv) P(B A) Answer It is given that P(A) = 0.54, P(B) = 0.69, P(A B) = 0.35 (i) We know that P (A B) = P(A) + P(B) P(A B) P (A B) = 0.54 + 0.69 0.35 = 0.88 (ii) A B = (A B) [by De Morgans law] P(A B) = P(A B) = 1 P(A B) = 1 0.88 = 0.12 (iii) P(A B) = P(A) P(A B) = 0.54 0.35 = 0.19 (iv) We know that
Class XI
Maths
Question 8: From the employees of a company, 5 persons are selected to represent them in the managing committee of the company. Particulars of five persons are as follows: S. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Name Harish Rohan Sheetal Alis Salim Sex M M F F M Age in years 30 33 46 28 41
A person is selected at random from this group to act as a spokesperson. What is the probability that the spokesperson will be either male or over 35 years? Answer Let E be the event in which the spokesperson will be a male and F be the event in which the spokesperson will be over 35 years of age.
Accordingly, P(E) =
and P(F) =
Since there is only one male who is over 35 years of age,
We know that
Thus, the probability that the spokesperson will either be a male or over 35 years of age
is
Question 9:
Class XI
Maths
If 4-digit numbers greater than 5,000 are randomly formed from the digits 0, 1, 3, 5, and 7, what is the probability of forming a number divisible by 5 when, (i) the digits are repeated? (ii) the repetition of digits is not allowed? Answer (i) When the digits are repeated Since four-digit numbers greater than 5000 are formed, the leftmost digit is either 7 or 5. The remaining 3 places can be filled by any of the digits 0, 1, 3, 5, or 7 as repetition of digits is allowed. Total number of 4-digit numbers greater than 5000 = 2 5 5 5 = 250 A number is divisible by 5 if the digit at its units place is either 0 or 5. Total number of 4-digit numbers greater than 5000 that are divisible by 5 = 2 5 5 2 = 100 Thus, the probability of forming a number divisible by 5 when the digits are repeated is
. (ii) When repetition of digits is not allowed The thousands place can be filled with either of the two digits 5 or 7. The remaining 3 places can be filled with any of the remaining 4 digits. Total number of 4-digit numbers greater than 5000 = 2 4 3 2 = 48 When the digit at the thousands place is 5, the units place can be filled only with 0 and the tens and hundreds places can be filled with any two of the remaining 3 digits. Here, number of 4-digit numbers starting with 5 and divisible by 5 = 3 2 = 6 When the digit at the thousands place is 7, the units place can be filled in two ways (0 or 5) and the tens and hundreds places can be filled with any two of the remaining 3 digits. Here, number of 4-digit numbers starting with 7 and divisible by 5 = 1 2 3 2 = 12 Total number of 4-digit numbers greater than 5000 that are divisible by 5 = 6 + 12 = 18 Thus, the probability of forming a number divisible by 5 when the repetition of digits is
not allowed is
Maths
The number lock of a suitcase has 4 wheels, each labelled with ten digits i.e., from 0 to 9. The lock opens with a sequence of four digits with no repeats. What is the probability of a person getting the right sequence to open the suitcase? Answer The number lock has 4 wheels, each labelled with ten digits i.e., from 0 to 9. Number of ways of selecting 4 different digits out of the 10 digits = Now, each combination of 4 different digits can be arranged in ways.
Number of four digits with no repetitions = There is only one number that can open the suitcase.
Thus, the required probability is

11 Math

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

11 Math

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Class XI

Class XI Hence, this collection is a set.

(ii) B = {x: x is an integer, (iii) C = {x: x is an integer, }

(ii) B = {x: x is an integer;

It can be seen that B (iii) C = {x: x is an integer; It can be seen that

(vii) {x: x is an even natural number} {x: x is an integer}

Class XI (xi) {} A Answer A = {1, 2, {3, 4}, 5}

Question 5: How many elements has P(A), if A = ? Page 13 of 44

Class XI (vii) B C D Answer

Class XI (i) A B (ii) A C (iii) A D (iv) B C (v) B D (vi) C D Answer

Question 10: If X = {a, b, c, d} and Y = {f, b, d, g}, find

Class XI (iii) C = {a, c, e, g} (iv) D = {f, g, h, a} Answer U = {a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h} (i) A = {a, b, c}

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Answer (i)

Class XI It is given that:

n(X) = 17, n(Y) = 23, n(X Y) = 38 n(X Y) = ? We know that:

n(X f? Y) = ? We know that:

Thus, 50 people can speak both Hindi and English.

Class XI n (T C) = 35 10 = 25 Thus, 25 people like only tennis.

Class XI As A B BC However, (iii) True Let A B and B C. Let x A

x A and x C xC BC Similarly, we can show that C B. B=C

Class XI (i) (ii) Let A B To show: Clearly, Let

Case II: x B Then, Conversely, let Let x A

Class XI x A and x B xB AB Hence, (i) (iv).

Class XI Let x A (B A) x A or x (B A) x A or (x B and x A)

Question 10: Page 39 of 44

Accordingly, A B = {1}, B C = {2}, and A C = {0}. A B, B C, and A C are non-empty. However, A B C =

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

, find the values of x and y.

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

We know that |x| =

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

(iii) (iv) It is given that t(C) = 212

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

The relation f is defined by

If f(x) = x2, find Answer

Find the domain of the function Answer

The given function is

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

be a function from R into R. Determine the range of f.

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 2 Relations and Functions

Chapter 3 Trigonometric Functions

degree Since 180 = radian

(iii) 240 We know that 180 = radian

(iv) 520 We know that 180 = radian

Page 1 of 44 Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717

Chapter 3 Trigonometric Functions

(i) We know that radian = 180

(ii) 4 We know that radian = 180

(iii) We know that radian = 180

Page 2 of 44 Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717

Chapter 3 Trigonometric Functions

(iv) We know that radian = 180

cm by an arc of length 22 cm Answer

Therefore, forr = 100 cm, l = 22 cm, we have

Thus, the required angle is 1236.